NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection...

412
NetVault Administrator’s Guide Version 6.03 Release Date 01/15/2001

Transcript of NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection...

Page 1: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVaultAdministrator’s

Guide

Version 6.03

Release Date 01/15/2001

Page 2: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

Copyrights

Software Copyright © 2001 BakBone Software

NetVault Administrator’s Guide

Copyright © 2001 BakBone Software

Printed and online versions.

This software product is copyrighted and all rights are reserved. The distribution and sale ofthis product are intended for the use of the original purchaser only per the terms of theLicense Agreement. All other product trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

The NetVault Administrator’s Guide documentation is copyrighted and all rights are reserved.

This document may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated,reduced or transferred to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without priorconsent in writing from BakBone Software.

THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHEREXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ORNON-INFRINGEMENT.

THIS PUBLICATION COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INACCURACIES ORTYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS. CHANGES ARE PERIODICALLY ADDED TO THEINFORMATION HEREIN; THESE CHANGES WILL BE INCORPORATED INTO NEWEDITIONS OF THE PUBLICATION. BAKBONE SOFTWARE MAY MAKE IMPORVEMENTSAND/OR CHANGES IN THE PRODUCT(S) AND/OR THE PROGRAM(S) DESCRIBED INTHIS PUBLICATION AT ANY TIME.

BakBone Software10145 Pacific Heights Blvd.Suite 900San Diego, California 92121858.450.9009

Page 3: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 1INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................... 1Introducing NetVault ............................................................................................................. 3NetVault Features ................................................................................................................. 3NetVault Application Plugin Modules .................................................................................... 4About This Guide .................................................................................................................. 4Using Help ............................................................................................................................ 5About BakBone Software...................................................................................................... 6Technical Support ................................................................................................................. 6

BakBone Software Web Site: www.bakbone.com.......................................................... 6Helpdesk Support Lines ................................................................................................. 6

CHAPTER 2MANAGING NETVAULT SOFTWARE............................................................................. 7Installing NetVault Software .................................................................................................. 9

Types of Installation ....................................................................................................... 9General Installation Requirements ................................................................................. 9Windows NT Installation............................................................................................... 10AIX 4.2 and 4.3 (IBM RS 6000) ................................................................................... 16Compaq TRU64 (4.0b and later) .................................................................................. 17FreeBSD 3.2................................................................................................................. 17HP-UX 10 and 11, HP9000/700 HP9000/800 .............................................................. 17IRIX 6.2 and 6.5 (Silicon Graphics, SGI)...................................................................... 18LINUX (Intel x86).......................................................................................................... 18Microsoft Windows 2000 .............................................................................................. 18Microsoft Windows 95/98 Client ................................................................................... 19Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (Intel x86) .......................................................................... 19NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03.................................................................................. 19SCO Open Server 5 ..................................................................................................... 20Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) ............................................................................................. 20Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) ............................................................................................. 21Sun Solaris 7 (Intel x86) ............................................................................................... 21Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) ................................................................................................ 22UnixWare 2.1.3............................................................................................................. 23UnixWare 7................................................................................................................... 23

CONTENTS

Page 4: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

ii Contents

Calculating NetVault Database (NVDB) Size Requirements ........................................24Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s................................................................................ 25

Installing a Plugin or APM.............................................................................................25Removing a Plugin or APM...........................................................................................26

Licenses for NetVault Products .......................................................................................... 26Locating Machine IDs ...................................................................................................27Requesting your License Key .......................................................................................28Installing a License Key ................................................................................................28

Upgrading from Earlier Versions of NetVault ...................................................................... 30Upgrading from NetVault 6.0.1 to a Later Version ........................................................30Upgrading from NetVault 6.0.0 to a Later Version ........................................................30

Using the NetVault Configurator ......................................................................................... 31Starting the Configurator ...............................................................................................32Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog Box...................................................32Using the Debugging (Tracing) Feature........................................................................37

Configuring NetVault 6.x..................................................................................................... 38Configuring a SCSI LUN for a Linux kernel ..................................................................38Setting up the kernel .....................................................................................................38

Uninstalling NetVault .......................................................................................................... 39Uninstalling NetVault from Windows NT Machines.......................................................39Uninstalling NetVault from Solaris or MP-RAS Machines .............................................40Uninstalling NetVault from other UNIX or Linux Installations ........................................40

CHAPTER 3NETVAULT BASICS .................................................................................................. 41Graphical User Interface..................................................................................................... 43

Menu Bar ......................................................................................................................43Command Toolbar ........................................................................................................45Status Line ....................................................................................................................46

Managing Devices and Clients ........................................................................................... 46Device Management Window .......................................................................................47Client Management Window .........................................................................................48Domain Management Window......................................................................................48

Managing Media ................................................................................................................. 49Media Management Window ........................................................................................50Status Window ..............................................................................................................50

Backing Up Data................................................................................................................. 51Backup Window ............................................................................................................52

Restoring Backed Up Data ................................................................................................. 53Restore Window............................................................................................................53

Job Operations ................................................................................................................... 54Jobs Window.................................................................................................................54Logs Window ................................................................................................................55

Page 5: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide iii

Using Templates .................................................................................................................56Policy Management Window ........................................................................................ 56

Searching for Data ..............................................................................................................57Selecting Items ...................................................................................................................58

CHAPTER 4DEVICE AND LIBRARY MANAGEMENT........................................................................ 59What are NetVault Devices? ...............................................................................................61

Device Types................................................................................................................ 61Device Connections...................................................................................................... 61Planning a Shared Device Installation.......................................................................... 61Devices in a Windows NT Environment ....................................................................... 63Shared Devices ............................................................................................................ 63Setting up a Device ...................................................................................................... 63

Working with the Device Management Window..................................................................64Menu Bar ...................................................................................................................... 64Window Tabs................................................................................................................ 65Icons and Drive Lights .................................................................................................. 65The Devices Tab .......................................................................................................... 66The Device Logs Tab ................................................................................................... 71The Media Requests Tab ............................................................................................. 72

Adding NetVault Devices.....................................................................................................77Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client ............................................................. 77Adding Libraries............................................................................................................ 81Adding a Shared Library............................................................................................... 87Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients ........................................................ 91Adding Devices in Windows 2000 ................................................................................ 92Working with Firewalls .................................................................................................. 94Creating Virtual Libraries .............................................................................................. 94

Scanning Drives and Media ................................................................................................94Scanning for Shared Drives.......................................................................................... 94Scanning Media............................................................................................................ 95

Working with Cleaning Drives/Slots ....................................................................................97Configuring Cleaning Drives/Slots................................................................................ 97Checking Status on Cleaning Drives/Slots ................................................................... 98Setting the Life of Cleaning Media.............................................................................. 100Setting an Automatic Cleaning Interval ...................................................................... 100Manually Cleaning Media ........................................................................................... 101

CHAPTER 5CLIENT MANAGEMENT ........................................................................................... 103Client Management ...........................................................................................................105The Client Management Window......................................................................................105

Page 6: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

iv Contents

Using the Available NetVault Machines List Box ........................................................106Using the Clients List Box ...........................................................................................107Using Find NetVault Machine .....................................................................................108

Adding a NetVault Client.................................................................................................... 111

CHAPTER 6DOMAIN MANAGEMENT .......................................................................................... 115Domain Management ........................................................................................................117The NetVault Domain Management Window.....................................................................117

Using the Available NetVault Servers List Box ...........................................................118Using the Controlled Servers List Box ........................................................................119Using Find NetVault Machine .....................................................................................121

CHAPTER 7MEDIA MANAGEMENT ............................................................................................ 125Media Management.......................................................................................................... 127The Media Management Window..................................................................................... 127

Using the Media List Box ............................................................................................128Status Information in Details Area ..............................................................................129Using the Backup Saveset Pop-up Menu ...................................................................135Backup Saveset Information in Details Area...............................................................135

CHAPTER 8NETVAULT SERVER STATUS .................................................................................. 139The NetVault Server Status Window ................................................................................ 141

Using the Device Status Area .....................................................................................142Using the Client Status Area.......................................................................................143Using the Job Status Area ..........................................................................................143Using Operator Status Area........................................................................................146

CHAPTER 9DISASTER RECOVERY ............................................................................................ 147Disaster Recovery ............................................................................................................ 149The NetVault Database .................................................................................................... 149Backing Up the NetVault Database .................................................................................. 149NetVault Database Recovery ........................................................................................... 149

Restoring Basic Operating System .............................................................................149Restoring NetVault Operation .....................................................................................150Handling Backups Since Last NV Database Backup..................................................150

Restoring the NetVault Database ..................................................................................... 150Importing Media Unknown to NV Database ..................................................................... 151Using the Data Copy Plugin ............................................................................................. 151

Target Audience..........................................................................................................152

Page 7: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide v

Installing the Data Copy Plugin .................................................................................. 152Backing Up Data with the Data Copy Plugin .............................................................. 152Copying Data.............................................................................................................. 152Copying a Backup ...................................................................................................... 155Copying a Backup Set ................................................................................................ 156

CHAPTER 10BACKING UP DATA................................................................................................ 157Backing up Your Data .......................................................................................................159The NetVault Backup Window...........................................................................................159

Backup Window Buttons............................................................................................. 160Window Tabs.............................................................................................................. 160Menu Commands ....................................................................................................... 161Using the Selections Tab............................................................................................ 162Using the Backup Options Tab................................................................................... 168Using the Schedule Tab ............................................................................................. 173Using the Target Tab.................................................................................................. 174Advanced Options ...................................................................................................... 178Savesets..................................................................................................................... 178

Incremental Backup Procedure.........................................................................................179Creating a Typical Weekly Full and Incremental Schedule ........................................ 179

Restoring Incremental Backups ........................................................................................180Doing a Simple Backup.....................................................................................................180Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin .........................................................182

Installing the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin.............................................. 182How the Plugin Works ................................................................................................ 182Consolidating Backups ............................................................................................... 182

Using the Raw Device Plugin............................................................................................186Installing the Raw Device Plugin ................................................................................ 186Using the Raw Device Plugin for NT .......................................................................... 187Using the Raw Device Plugin for UNIX ...................................................................... 192

CHAPTER 11RESTORING DATA.................................................................................................. 197Restoring Data ..................................................................................................................199The NetVault Restore Window..........................................................................................199

Restore Window Buttons ............................................................................................ 200Window Tabs.............................................................................................................. 200Menu Commands ....................................................................................................... 201Using the Selections Tab............................................................................................ 202Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection.................................................................. 205Using the Restore Search Facility .............................................................................. 209Using Restore Filter Options ...................................................................................... 210

Page 8: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

vi Contents

Using the Restore Options Tab...................................................................................212Using the Target Client Tab ........................................................................................215Using the Schedule Tab..............................................................................................216Using the Advanced Options Tab ...............................................................................217Savesets .....................................................................................................................218

Restoring Incremental Backups........................................................................................ 218Doing a Simple Restore.................................................................................................... 221

CHAPTER 12SCHEDULING BACKUP & RESTORE JOBS ............................................................... 225Scheduling Jobs ............................................................................................................... 227

Schedule Options........................................................................................................227Using Schedule - Immediate.......................................................................................228Using Schedule - Once ...............................................................................................228Using Schedule - Repeating .......................................................................................232Using Schedule - Triggered ........................................................................................237

CHAPTER 13JOB MANAGEMENT................................................................................................ 239Managing Jobs ................................................................................................................. 241

Job Management Tabs ...............................................................................................241Using The Status Tab .................................................................................................242Using the Jobs Tab .....................................................................................................245Using the History Tab .................................................................................................247

CHAPTER 14USING LOGS ......................................................................................................... 249Using Logs........................................................................................................................ 251The Logs Window............................................................................................................. 251

Logs Window Buttons .................................................................................................252Using the Logs Window ..............................................................................................252Viewing Extended Logs ..............................................................................................254More Info - Job Messages ..........................................................................................255More Info - Warnings ..................................................................................................256More Info - Errors ........................................................................................................257Filtering Logs ..............................................................................................................258Using the Filter Options Dialog Box ............................................................................259

CHAPTER 15USING POLICY (SET) TEMPLATES........................................................................... 263What are Policy (Set) Templates? .................................................................................... 265Types of Policy Sets ......................................................................................................... 265

Backup and Restore Job Sets ....................................................................................265

Page 9: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide vii

Backup Job Sets......................................................................................................... 265Restore Job Sets ........................................................................................................ 266Standard Policy (Set) Operations ............................................................................... 266Saving a Set using the Save As button ...................................................................... 267Loading a Set using the Load button.......................................................................... 268Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box ........................................................ 268Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded)........................................... 269Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (Set Loaded) ................................................ 269Guidelines for using Schedule Sets............................................................................ 270

Using Policy Management ................................................................................................270

CHAPTER 16USING ADVANCED FEATURES ................................................................................ 271What are Advanced Features? .........................................................................................273Using the Advanced Options Tab......................................................................................273

Backup Life (Backup only).......................................................................................... 274Compression (Backup and Restore) .......................................................................... 274Verify after Backup (Backup only) .............................................................................. 275Duplication (Backup only) ........................................................................................... 275Pre and Post Scripts (Backup and Restore)............................................................... 278NetVault Jobs, Pre & Post Scripts Execution Logic.................................................... 280

Working with Firewalls ......................................................................................................288

APPENDIX APERFORMANCE TUNING ......................................................................................... 289What is Performance Tuning?...........................................................................................291Optimizing Drive Performance ..........................................................................................291Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box ...................................................................................292

From a Selected Drive................................................................................................ 292From the Device Management Window ..................................................................... 292From the Library Configure Tab ................................................................................. 293

Using the Edit Drive Window ............................................................................................294Relationship between Block Size and Shared Memory Size...................................... 297

Gathering Statistics ...........................................................................................................297Viewing the Statistics.................................................................................................. 298

Understanding How the Data Stream is Handled..............................................................302

APPENDIX BTROUBLESHOOTING ............................................................................................... 303Getting Help ......................................................................................................................305Dumping Log Files ............................................................................................................305Producing Trace Files .......................................................................................................306Running the NetVault Configurator ...................................................................................306

NetVault for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0...................................................................... 306

Page 10: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

viii Contents

NetVault for UNIX .......................................................................................................306Help with Common Problems ........................................................................................... 307

Waiting for Media ........................................................................................................307Checking Media Request, Media Status and Job Log ................................................307Block Sizes and Shared Memory Configuration .........................................................308Tips on Backing Up Sybase........................................................................................308Using CPIO to Retrieve Files from a NetVault Tape...................................................309Informix Configurations ...............................................................................................311Missing Icons in the NetVault GUI ..............................................................................311Multiple Network Interface Cards (NIC) and communication problems ......................311Overheads in writing to tape .......................................................................................312Oracle backup fails with "Can't open XXXX" message ...............................................312Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients .......313Why does NetVault not allow you to backup the proc directory? ................................314

APPENDIX CUSING REGULAR EXPRESSIONS ............................................................................. 315What is a Regular Expression? ........................................................................................ 317Where are Regular Expressions Used? ........................................................................... 317Using Regular Expressions .............................................................................................. 317

APPENDIX DHARDWARE AND SOFTWARE SUPPORT................................................................... 321Platform and Operating System Support.......................................................................... 323Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver ..................................................................... 323

Installation from Image File .........................................................................................323Copying the Software from the CD-ROM....................................................................324Installing the Software from Image .............................................................................324Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver................................................................325Post-Installation ..........................................................................................................327Specifying Media Changer to RS6000........................................................................327NetVault Utilities..........................................................................................................327

APPENDIX ECREATING VIRTUAL LIBRARIES .............................................................................. 329Creating Virtual Libraries .................................................................................................. 331

Getting Set Up to Create a Virtual Library ..................................................................331Generating Disk Devices ............................................................................................332

APPENDIX FUSING THE NETVAULT CONFIGURATOR .................................................................. 335Using the NetVault Configurator ....................................................................................... 337

Machine Tab ...............................................................................................................337License Tab ................................................................................................................338

Page 11: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide ix

Service Tab ................................................................................................................ 339Packages Tab............................................................................................................. 340General Tab................................................................................................................ 341Plugin Options Tab ..................................................................................................... 343Fire Wall Tab .............................................................................................................. 344GUI Tab ...................................................................................................................... 345Logging Daemon Tab ................................................................................................. 349Media Manager Tab ................................................................................................... 351Network Manager Tab ................................................................................................ 352Schedule Manager Tab .............................................................................................. 355Security Tab .............................................................................................................. 357

APPENDIX GUSING THE REPORTING TOOL ................................................................................ 359Using the Reporting Tool...................................................................................................361Running nvreport from the Command Line.......................................................................361Report Arguments .............................................................................................................361Simple Report Example ....................................................................................................362Using Filters Example .......................................................................................................363Sorting Output ...................................................................................................................364Creating Custom Templates..............................................................................................365

Making New Templates .............................................................................................. 366Using the Server Argument ........................................................................................ 367

Fields Available for Reports ..............................................................................................367Report: jobdefinitions (jd)............................................................................................ 368Report: jobhistory (jh) ................................................................................................. 369Report: advancedoptions (ao) .................................................................................... 370Report: schedules (sc)................................................................................................ 370Report: backuptargets (bt).......................................................................................... 370Report: selections (se)................................................................................................ 370

Constants and Syntax .......................................................................................................370

INDEX

Page 12: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 13: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 1

IntroductionIntroducing NetVault - 3

NetVault Features - 3

NetVault Application Plugin Modules - 4

About This Guide - 4

Using Help - 5

About BakBone Software - 6

Technical Support - 6

Page 14: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 15: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 3

Introducing NetVault

Information is a priceless asset to organizations. As storage environments grow, it becomesincreasingly difficult to backup corporate data while keeping the applications your usersneed up and running.

NetVault from BakBone Software is a scalable solution for departments, data centers andenterprises available on UNIX and Windows NT operating systems. NetVault is built on amodular software architecture created for expansion, growth and continued enhancement ofa growing variety of applications. NetVault also supports various storage network designs,including Storage Area Networks (SAN) and Network Attached Storage (NAS). Providingenterprise-wide control in distributed and centralized environments, NetVault is able tooperate in multi-vendor networks and supports a broad range of servers, clients, databaseapplications, storage media and high performance devices.

NetVault Features

The NetVault storage management features are many and varied and include:

� Use of native NetVault API for application integration.

� Easy-to-use administration graphical user interface (GUI) for both UNIX and Windows.

� Point and click installation of Application Plugin Modules (APM™) to NetVault servers orclients across networks.

� Define pre and post processing scripts.

� Support for raw devices and file systems.

� Extensive low level error checking, logging and reporting.

� Tunable shared transfer memory and block size for optimized performance.

� Local or remote backup and recovery.

� SAN-enabled and LAN-free backup.

� Dynamically Shared Devices across SANs or shared SCSI.

� Library Sharing among servers and clients.

� Duplication for off-site disaster recovery.

� Disk staging for increased performance across networks.

� Supports as many data streams as there are devices.

� Standard, non-proprietary tape formats, CPIO for UNIX and MTF for Windows.

Page 16: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

4 Chapter 1Introduction

NetVault Application Plugin Modules

NetVault offers Application Plugin Modules (APM™) which, when combined with theNetVault software, provide application specific interfaces for a wide variety of databasemanagers, including:

� Microsoft® Exchange™

� Microsoft SQL™

� DB2™

� Sybase™

� Informix™

� Oracle Online™

� Oracle RMAN™

� SAP R/3 Backint™

Each of the APM’s is explained in detail in the NetVault Application Plugin Module User’sGuide.

About This Guide

In the Administrator’s Guide you will find basic NetVault operations for managing yourdevices and data.

The Administrator’s Guide is divided into four sections:

� Section One: The first section introduces you to NetVault, its features and BakBoneSoftware. It explains how to install and manage the NetVault software. Section one alsoincludes information on the user interface, basic operations and how to search for andselect data items.

� Section Two: The second section contains a series of chapters devoted to managingyour devices, libraries, clients and domains.

� Section Three: In section three you will learn how to manage the media you use to storeyour data. You will also discover how to back up your data and restore that data whennecessary. In addition, there are instructions on how to schedule and manage the jobsyou run, and how to use the job logs.

NOTE: This guide assumes you have a working knowledge of your computerand its operating conventions, including how to use a mouse and standardmenus and commands. It also assumes you know how to open, save, and closefiles. For help with any of these techniques, please see your Operating Systemdocumentation.

Page 17: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 5

� Section Four: Section four contains information on using Policy Sets to record and re-use job options. In this section you will also learn about the advanced options used tofurther define the way you work with your data.

Using Help

NetVault provides a fully interactive online help system. By pressing the F1 key, you canopen the help files at any time, as shown in the following figure:

From the Help Contents window you can:

� Learn How to use Help

� Learn how to Get Started

� Access the Help Index

� Access the Glossary

� Display Procedures

� Display Functional Descriptions

� Click on a specific icon to learn about a management function or job operation

Page 18: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

6 Chapter 1Introduction

� Open the help topics for menu commands

� Learn more about plugins from the NetVault Plugin Index

About BakBone Software

Headquartered in San Diego, California, BakBone Software is a storage-managementsoftware company with offices worldwide. BakBone Software is committed to developing andproviding high-performance backup and recovery, archival, near-line and off-line storagesolutions that address the problems of modern data storage management.

Technical Support

BakBone Software is dedicated to providing friendly, expert advice to NetVault productcustomers. Our highly trained professionals are available to answer your questions, offersolutions to your problems and generally help you make the most of your NetVault purchase.

Log on to our web site, or contact our Helpdesk, for more information.

BakBone Software Web Site: www.bakbone.com

Helpdesk Support Lines

Area Contact

North America 1.877.955.BONE (955.2663)e-mail: [email protected]

Europe +44.1202.244727+44.1202.244728e-mail: [email protected]

Asia Pacific Rim +81.3.5908.3517e-mail: [email protected]

Page 19: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 2

Managing NetVault SoftwareInstalling NetVault Software - 9

� Types of Installation - 9� General Installation Requirements - 9� Windows NT Installation - 10� AIX 4.2 and 4.3 (IBM RS 6000) - 16� Compaq TRU64 (4.0b and later) - 17� FreeBSD 3.2 - 17� HP-UX 10 and 11, HP9000/700 HP9000/800 - 17� IRIX 6.2 and 6.5 (Silicon Graphics, SGI) - 18� LINUX (Intel x86) - 18� Microsoft Windows 2000 - 18� Microsoft Windows 95/98 Client - 19� Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (Intel x86) - 19� NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03 - 19� SCO Open Server 5 - 20� Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC) - 20� Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC) - 21� Sun Solaris 7 (Intel x86) - 21� Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) - 22� UnixWare 2.1.3 - 23� UnixWare 7 - 23� Calculating NetVault Database (NVDB) Size Requirements - 24

Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s - 25

� Installing a Plugin or APM - 25� Removing a Plugin or APM - 26

Licenses for NetVault Products - 26

� Locating Machine IDs - 27� Requesting your License Key - 28� Installing a License Key - 28

Upgrading from Earlier Versions of NetVault - 30

Using the NetVault Configurator - 31

Page 20: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

8 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

� Starting the Configurator - 32� Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog Box - 32� Using the Debugging (Tracing) Feature - 37

Configuring NetVault 6.x - 38

� Configuring a SCSI LUN for a Linux kernel - 38� Setting up the kernel - 38

Uninstalling NetVault - 39

� Uninstalling NetVault from Windows NT Machines - 39� Uninstalling NetVault from Solaris or MP-RAS Machines - 40� Uninstalling NetVault from other UNIX or Linux Installations - 40

Page 21: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 9

Installing NetVault Software

NetVault Software is easy to install. The instructions contained here are also available in thebooklet included in the software’s CD-ROM case. Familiarize yourself with the followinginformation before installing the NetVault software.

Types of InstallationThere are three types of installations:

� NetVault Server System: Provides the full range of NetVault facilities withlocal control using an installed Graphical User Interface (GUI), or remotelyover the network with proper security authorization. This type of installationcan also act as a client.

� NetVault Client System: Provides a subset of NetVault facilities, without thelocal device support, controlled remotely over the network with proper securityauthorization.

� Custom NetVault System: Provides the facility to install specific NetVaultmodules.

General Installation RequirementsBefore installing NetVault Software, the following requirements must be in place:

� Sufficient disk space to install and use the software. The amount of diskspace required depends on the operating system, installation method andlikely usage of the NetVault system. For example, in a NetVault EnterpriseSystem backing up a large number of NetVault clients, the NetVault Databasedirectory could be fairly large and require more disk space. If you needassistance determining the amount of space required, contact BakBoneTechnical Support (page 6).

� A TCP/IP network. A TCP/IP network is required unless you intend to use theNetVault Software in a standalone configuration. This type of network is notnecessary if the NetVault Server is backing itself up to a local device.

� NetVault Graphic Requirements. Minimum graphic display resolution (underMicrosoft Windows NT or UNIX X-Windows) of 800 x 600 pixels displaying256 colors.

NOTE: Refer to Appendix D, Hardware and Software Support (page 321) todetermine whether the operating system, platform, and tape device you areusing is supported. You can also find this information on the NetVaultTechnical Support web site at http://www.netvault.co.uk.

Page 22: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

10 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

Windows NT InstallationThe requirements for installing NetVault on a Windows NT system are as follows:

� A computer running Microsoft Windows NT, version 4.0 with at least 32 MbytesRAM. At this time only the Intel processor (or compatible) is supported. Youmust also have SP3 (NT 4.0) or later installed.

� Approximately 10 Mbytes of available disk space; more if you intend to use thismachine to control a large NetVault domain (a server and many clients) or largemulti-drive tape libraries.

� For NetVault Server and Custom installations (with the GUI), it is necessary topre-install Microsoft Internet Explorer Version 3.02 or later, in order to use theHTML-based help system (NT version 4.0 or later) included with the NetVaultSoftware.

� A TCP/IP network if you are not using the software in a standaloneconfiguration.

Installation ProcedureTo install the NetVault Software on a Windows NT workstation or server, follow thesesteps:

1. Log on as the Administrator or as a user with Administrator privileges.

2. Close all programs.

3. Insert Disk 1 into the CD-ROM drive.

4. Run SETUP.EXE.

An InstallShield Wizard opens and begins the installation setup.

NOTE: The CD-ROM distribution is split into disk folders, which may becopied to make a set of installation floppy disks. By running SETUP.EXE inthe first disk folder, all the software in the other disk folders will automaticallybe installed, without re-selection.

Page 23: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 11

5. Once the InstallShield Wizard has loaded, the NetVault Setup Welcome dialogbox opens, as shown in the following figure:

6. Click Next to open the License Agreement window:

Page 24: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

12 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

7. Click Next to open the User Information dialog box:

8. Enter your Name and Company and click Next to open the Choose DestinationLocation dialog box:

Page 25: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 13

9. If the Destination Folder is where you want the software to be installed, clickNext to proceed to the Enter Database dialog box:

10. Click Next to open the Setup Type dialog box. If you want to change thedestination for the installation, click the Browse button; navigate to and selectthe desired location, then click Next to proceed.

The Setup Type dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure:

11. Select the desired Setup Type for the type of installation you are doing:

� Custom NetVault System

� NetVault Client System

� NetVault Server System

Page 26: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

14 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

12. Click Next to open the Enter Machine Name dialog box:

13. Enter the desired NetVault Machine Name. This name does not have to be thesame as your computer machine name, but it is recommended that the NetVaultmachine name be the same as the computer name.

14. Click Next to open the NetVault Password dialog box:

NOTE: Machine names are alpha/numeric strings of any length with theexception of capital letters, spaces and punctuation (especially hyphens).Do not use these characters in your machine names.

Page 27: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 15

15. Enter the NetVault Password information.

16. Click Next.

The InstallShield progress meter appears, as shown in the following figure:

NOTE: The NetVault Security Password allows access to your machine fromNetVault. This information should be secured so that only the NetVaultDomain Administrators for your system have access to it.

You can change the password and disable security using the NetVaultConfigurator. See Using the NetVault Configurator (page 31) for moreinformation.

Page 28: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

16 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

When the installation is complete, the Setup Complete dialog box opens:

17. Select the desired option by clicking the appropriate option button:

� Yes, I want to restart my computer now.

� No, I will restart my computer later.

18. Click Finish.

AIX 4.2 and 4.3 (IBM RS 6000)Mounting the CD-ROM:

If the CD-ROM is not already mounted, mount it using the SMIT utility

Use the SMIT utility to install the CD-ROM file:

/aix/image

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the commands:

cd <cdrom>/aix

(where <cdrom> is the device node for your CD-ROM)

./install nvdist

NOTE: It is recommended that you restart your computer. Some NetVaultfiles require updating with a reboot in order to function properly.

Page 29: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 17

Compaq TRU64 (4.0b and later)Mounting the CD-ROM:

Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point/cdrom already exists):

su root

mount -r -t cdfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

cd /CDROM/TRU64

./INSTALL NVDIST

FreeBSD 3.2Mounting the CD-ROM:

Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point/cdrom already exists):

su root

mount -rt cd9660 <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

cd/cdrom/cdrom0/freebsd

./install nvdist

HP-UX 10 and 11, HP9000/700 HP9000/800Mounting the CD-ROM:

Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists):

su root

NOTE: Ensure install has execute permission.

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Page 30: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

18 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

mount -r -F cdfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

cd /HP

./INSTALL NVDIST

IRIX 6.2 and 6.5 (Silicon Graphics, SGI)Mounting the CD-ROM:

Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point/cdrom already exists):

su root

mount -t iso9660 <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the commands:

cd /cdrom/irix

./install nvdist

LINUX (Intel x86)Mounting the CD-ROM:

Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point/mnt/cdrom already exists):

su root

mount /mnt/cdrom

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the commands:

cd /cdrom/linux

./install nvdist

Microsoft Windows 2000Installing the NetVault Software:

NOTE: Ensure install has execute permission

Page 31: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 19

1. Log on as Administrator, or as a user account with Administrator privileges.

2. Close down as many other applications as possible, and insert the NetVaultdistribution CD-ROM into the relevant drive.

3. Run setup.exe located as follows:

<cd drive>\w2k\disk1\setup.exe

Microsoft Windows 95/98 ClientInstalling the NetVault Software:

1. Log on to the Windows95/98 machine.

2. Close down as many other applications as possible, and insert the NetVaultdistribution CD-ROM into the relevant drive.

3. Run setup.exe located as follows:

<cd drive>\win9x\disk1\setup.exe

Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 (Intel x86)Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as Administrator, or as a user account with Administrator privileges.

2. Close down as many other applications as possible, and insert the NetVaultdistribution CD-ROM into the relevant drive.

3. Run setup.exe located as follows:

<cd drive>\nt\disk1\setup.exe

In order to use the integrated HTML-base help system, it is necessary to haveMicrosoft Internet Explorer 3.02 or later, installed.

NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03Mounting the CD-ROM:

Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point/cdrom already exists):

su root

mount -r -F cdfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Page 32: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

20 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

pkgadd -d /cdrom/ncr/simage

(for NetVault Server installation), or

pkgadd -d /cdrom/ncr/cimage

(for NetVault Client installation).

SCO Open Server 5Mounting the CD-ROM:

Mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assuming the mount point/cdrom already exists):

su root

mount -r <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

cd/cdrom/cdrom0/scopkgadd -d/cdrom/cdrom0/sco/simage

(for NetVault Server installation), or

pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/sco/cimage

(for NetVault Client installation).

Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC)Mounting the CD-ROM:

If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automaticallywhen you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0.

Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assumingthe mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists):

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Page 33: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 21

su root

mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage

(for NetVault Server installation), or

pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage

(for NetVault Client installation).

Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC)Mounting the CD-ROM:

If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automaticallywhen you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0.

Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assumingthe mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists):

su root

mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage

(for NetVault Server installation), or

pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage

(for NetVault Client installation).

Sun Solaris 7 (Intel x86)Mounting the CD-ROM:

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Page 34: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

22 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automaticallywhen you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0.

Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assumingthe mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists):

su root

mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage

(for NetVault Server installation), or

pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage

(for NetVault Client installation).

Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC)Mounting the CD-ROM:

If the Solaris Volume manager is running, the CD-ROM is mounted automaticallywhen you insert it into the drive. The mount point is /cdrom/cdrom0.

Alternatively, you can mount the CD-ROM using the following commands (assumingthe mount point /cdrom/cdrom0 already exists):

su root

mount -r -F hsfs <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom/cdrom0

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/simage

(for NetVault Server installation), or

pkgadd -d /cdrom/cdrom0/solaris/cimage

(for NetVault Client installation).

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Page 35: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 23

UnixWare 2.1.3Mounting the CD-ROM:

If the CD-ROM does not mount automatically, mount it using the followingcommands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists):

su root

mount -F cdfs -o ro <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

cd/cdrom/uware213

./install nvdist

UnixWare 7Mounting the CD-ROM:

If the CD-ROM does not mount automatically, mount it using the followingcommands (assuming the mount point /cdrom already exists):

su root

mount -F cdfs -o ro <CD-ROM device node> /cdrom

Installing the NetVault Software:

1. Log on as root.

2. Run the command:

cd/cdrom/uware7pkgadd -d/cdrom/uware7/simage

(for NetVault Server installation), or

pkgadd -d /cdrom/uware7/cimage

(for NetVault Client installation).

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

NOTE: Once the software is installed, use the nvconfigurator to set thesecurity password to allow access from other NetVault servers and clients.

Page 36: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

24 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

Calculating NetVault Database (NVDB) Size RequirementsWhen the NetVault server software is installed, the installation includes a NetVaultDatabase directory (db or nvdb) containing four sub-directories:

� Install (tiny- 'modules' binary file detailing modules installed).

� Keys (tiny- licence key files for the main software and any plugins).

� MediaDatabase (LARGE after a while! - holds records for media and backupsperformed).

� ScheduleDatabase (small <10 Mbytes - holds records for all backup andrestore jobs).

The only portion of the database for which size requirements are an issue is theMediaDatabase. The NetVault Administrator of a particular NetVault domain mustestimate the anticipated size of the database to properly allocate adequate diskspace for growth.

To calculate the space requirements, you must have the following information:

1. The approximate number of files and directories being backed up in the NetVaultDomain (i.e. on the NetVault server and all NetVault clients).

Each file and directory backed up requires 60 bytes for an index entry in the NetVaultDatabase.

2. How many generations of each file are being kept.

Each generation is a separate instance of a file or directory backup. Forexample, if the same file is backed up seven times, using default backupsettings, there are said to be seven generations of the file held on media andindexed in the NetVault Database.

By default, backups have an infinite life (i.e. the number of generations increasesfor every backup, causing the NetVault Database to continuously grow in size).Most systems cannot handle this amount of storage requirement, so it is part ofthe NetVault Administrator's tasks to ensure that a suitable Backup Life isapplied to each backup (a setting found in the Advanced Options tab of theNetVault Backup window). Information on the Backup Life option can be found inUsing Help (page 5) and in Backup Life (Backup only) (page 274).

One example of calculating the NetVault Database size requirements is:

If 200,000 files and 15,000 directories are backed up once, approximately 13Megabytes for the NetVault Database indexing is required. If the same files anddirectories are backed up three times, 39 Megabytes would be required.

Under normal circumstances, it is reasonable to set a Backup Life option of Discardafter 7 Full Backups for File System backups.

With this option set, only seven generations of files/directories are retained (using theFile System plugin) for a particular backup selection. On the eighth backup, the first

Page 37: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 25

backup set of files/directories is discarded and removed from the NetVault Databaseindex.

A formula for estimating the space requirements (in bytes) for a number of machinesis:

Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s

NetVault plugins and APM’s are installed and removed from the NetVault ClientManagement window. A NetVault plugin or APM can be installed on any client of theNetVault server appearing in the Server Selection list.

Installing a Plugin or APM1. Open the NetVault Client Management window by clicking the Client

Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing theAdministration Client Management command.

2. Select the desired client in the Clients list.

NOTES:

(1) For some types of backup (e.g. online backup of some databases) it isnecessary to keep a very large number of generations. Consult TechnicalSupport (page 6) if space considerations are likely to be an issue.

(2) Some Backup Life settings may not clearly indicate the likely number ofgenerations. For example, when choosing the 'Discard after 25 weeks'setting, the number of generations kept depends on how many times youactually do this backup within the 25 week period.

NOTE: NetVault software includes a number of plugins which areautomatically installed. They are the Consolidated Backups, Data Copy,Consolidated File System Backups and Raw Device plugins. If you deleteany of these plugins you must reinstall NetVault to get them back. APM’s canbe installed and uninstalled as desired.

Approximatenumber of filesand directoriesbacked up permachine

X

Approximatenumber ofgenerations tobe kept usingBackup Lifeoptions

X

Number ofmachinesbacked up X 60

Page 38: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

26 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

3. Right-click and choose Install Software from the pop-up menu, as shown in thefollowing figure:

4. Navigate to and select the appropriate installation software.

5. Click Open to begin the installation process.

When the installation is complete, a successful installation message appears inthe Install Software dialog box.

Removing a Plugin or APM1. Open the NetVault Client Management window by clicking the Client

Management button on the command toolbars or by choosing theAdministration Client Management command.

2. Select the desired client in the Clients list.

3. Right-click and choose Remove Software from the pop-up menu.

Licenses for NetVault Products

Once installed, the NetVault software is operational for an evaluation period of 45 days.

To license purchased products, locate your machine IDs, contact BakBone Technical Support(page 6) for a license and then install the License Key. Each of these steps is detailed in thefollowing sections.

Page 39: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 27

Locating Machine IDsTo get the IDs of your NetVault machine (normally the NetVault server):

1. Open the NetVault Client Management window, by clicking the ClientManagement button on the command toolbars or by choosing theAdministration Client Management command.

2. Select the machine to be licensed in the Clients list.

3. Choose Properties from the pop-up menu to open the Client Properties dialogbox:

The Machine ID is displayed in the System tab.

Page 40: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

28 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

Requesting your License KeyTo request a NetVault License Key, provide the information on the Activation KeyRequest form to your local BakBone contact.

� Serial Number (as displayed on the label in the CD-ROM case - e.g., 01-01-0129).

� Company.

� Contact Name.

� Street Address.

� City.

� State.

� Zip/Postal code.

� Country (if located outside the United States)

� Phone Number.

� Fax Number.

� E-Mail.

� Reseller/Distributor.

� Machine ID of NetVault Server and any applicable Value-added ApplicationPlugin Modules purchased for and installed on that machine.

Local BakBone ContactsSend your completed license request form/information to your local BakBone contactas follows:

*When you complete the Activation Key Request form on the web site and clickSubmit it will be sent automatically to the proper location for processing.

Installing a License KeyA NetVault License Key is valid only for the Machine ID for which it is issued. LicenseKeys are e-mailed (or faxed) directly to the customer. It is recommended that the key

Area E-mail Fax Web*

AsiaPacificRim

[email protected] 81-3-5908-2472 www.bakbone.com/apac_keyrequest.asp

Europe [email protected] N/A www.bakbone.com/uk_keyrequest.asp

UnitesStates

[email protected] 858-450-0150 www.bakbone.com/keyrequest.asp

Page 41: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 29

be copied directly from the email into the Enter Key String box to avoid possibleerrors.

To install the license key:

1. Open the NetVault Client Management window by clicking the ClientManagement button on the command toolbars or by choosing theAdministration Client Management command.

2. Select the desired machine from the Clients list.

3. Right-click and choose Install License Key from the pop-up menu, shown inthe following figure:

A dialog box appears as shown in the following figure:

4. Copy the new key information from the e-mail into the Enter Key String box.

5. Click OK.

Page 42: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

30 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

If the license key is installed successfully, a message dialog box appears:

6. Click OK to complete the license key installation.

Upgrading from Earlier Versions of NetVault

Upgrading NetVault depends on the NetVault version you are upgrading from. Use thefollowing procedures as general guidelines only:

Upgrading from NetVault 6.0.1 to a Later VersionRun the install program as if you are doing a new install (dependant on the OS, asdescribed in the CD-ROM booklet):

1. The installation program will recognize that NetVault is already installed and therelevant software modules will be automatically updated.

2. There should be no problem regarding existing backup jobs or media createdunder Version 6.0.1.

3. Two new plugins are installed in a sub-directory of NetVault6: (1) the Data Copyplugin (for copying backups or backup sets from one item of media to another),and (2) the Consolidated File Server Backups plugin (which consolidates aFull backup and a number of incremental backups into a single backup saveset).These two new plugins are extras which can be installed into the active softwareand have no effect on what was done under Version 6.0.1.

Upgrading from NetVault 6.0.0 to a Later VersionTo upgrade from NetVault 6.0.0 to a later version, use the same steps as a newinstall procedure, as described in Installing NetVault Software (page 9). In addition,please note the following:

1. The installation program recognizes that NetVault is already installed and therelevant software modules are automatically updated.

2. Backup jobs performed using the Version 6.0.0 UNIX File System plugin (underUNIX) and NT File System plugin (under NT) are automatically altered to use thenew unified File System plugin introduced under Version 6.0.1.

3. Scheduled file system plugin jobs remain in the schedule after a reboot, and willrun as scheduled using the new File System plugin.

Page 43: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 31

4. When upgrading a NetVault server or client for NT, it is necessary to re-createall NT Registry backups. Under NetVault 6.0.0 these were performed using aseparate NT Registry plugin; under NetVault 6.0.1 the registry can be selectedas the last item appearing under the File System plugin so that a backup of theNT Registry can be included with any File System backup job for NT.

5. Devices are now added by default with the client name (i.e. NetVault name forthe machine, not necessarily the machine name, on either a NetVault server orNetVault client) as the first item of the standalone drive or library name. Notethat a device can be named almost any name you choose when adding adevice and, in some circumstances, the user MUST enter a name other than thedefault name.

General Guidelines for Upgrading NetVault� Backup your NetVault Database to a specific, identifiable item of media using

the Target Media By MID option.

� Make sure that you have enough time to do the upgrade and that everything isworking properly before important backups need to be run.

� Leave all normally used devices physically connected to the NetVault server(or client) machines and added to NetVault. This ensures that the deviceconfiguration data is properly upgraded.

Common Upgrade Problems and SolutionsWhen upgrading NetVault software installed using pkgadd (e.g. NCR MP-RAS andSolaris), the system may not allow the upgrade.

For example:

� In the file /var/sadm/pkg/install/admin/default (on an NCR MP-RAS box), thereis a line that affects pkgadd upgrade:

If

instance=unique

you must remove and then re-add a package.

If

instance=overwrite

you can upgrade without removing and then re-adding a package.

Using the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator is a configuration tool included as part of the standard NetVaultinstallation, even when the NetVault GUI (Graphical User Interface) is not installed. NetVaultoperates normally without the Configurator installed. There is no online help system for the

Page 44: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

32 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

NetVault Configurator. For complete information on the Configurator, see Appendix F, Usingthe NetVault Configurator (page 335).

Usually you will only use the NetVault Configurator to stop and re-start security settings. It isrecommended that you use the other options in the dialog box only under the guidance ofBakBone Technical Support (page 6).

For basic informational purposes, the main items of interest in the dialog box are described inthis section.

Starting the ConfiguratorTo start the NetVault Configurator in a Windows NT environment:

1. Choose Start>Programs>NetVault >NetVault Configurator.

To start the NetVault Configurator in a UNIX environment:

1. Change to the NetVault6/bin directory.

2. Issue the command:

./nvconfigurator

(or use ./txtconfig for command line NetVault Configurator).

Understanding the NetVault Configurator Dialog BoxThe NetVault Configurator dialog box contains a set of tabs that always appear in thedialog box. Information within these tabs vary depending on the installationcircumstances.

Machine tabThe Machine tab details information about the machine on which NetVault isinstalled, including the Machine ID required to get a permanent License Key afterproduct purchase.

Information on the Machine tab includes the Machine name, ID, network name, IPaddresses and software versions. This information is the same information availablein the Client Properties dialog box of the NetVault Interface.

Page 45: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 33

The NetVault Configurator’s Machine tab is shown in the following figure:

License TabThe License tab details the Server Capabilities and the Serial Numbers of AppliedKeys for the machine on which NetVault is installed. This information is the same asthat available in the Server Properties dialog box of NetVault’s DomainManagement window.

The NetVault Configurator License tab is shown in the following figure:

Page 46: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

34 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

Service TabThe Service tab allows you to start and stop NetVault service. After installation, orafter a system re-boot, the NetVault Process Manager is automatically started. TheCurrent State of NetVault is displayed in the Service tab.

When necessary, you can Start NetVault and Stop NetVault by clicking theappropriate buttons on the Service tab. Usually NetVault service is stopped onlywhen configuration settings must be changed, and only on the advice of BakBoneTechnical Support (page 6).

The NetVault Configurator’s Service tab is shown in the following figure:

Packages TabThe Packages tab is an alternative way to install or remove NetVault plugin software.The plugin installation procedure is explained in Installing NetVault Plugins andAPM’s (page 25).

The Packages tab is useful when NetVault plugin software is to be installed locally ona NetVault client (without a NetVault interface), rather than remotely from theNetVault server.

Page 47: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 35

The NetVault Configurator’s Packages tab is shown in the following figure:

Security TabIn the Security tab you can set a new password for the NetVault server or clientinstallation. In addition, security can be disabled by selecting the Disable Securitycheck box. When security is disabled, the machine can be accessed by anyNetVault Server.

Page 48: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

36 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

The NetVault Configurator’s Security tab is shown in the following figure:

General TabIf it becomes necessary to track down a problem in the NetVault program, you cangenerate debugging files in the General tab of the NetVault Configurator dialog boxby selecting the Generate debugging files check box. The debugging trace filesallow BakBone Technical Support (page 6) to find and correct problems in yourNetVault software.

The NetVault Configurator’s General tab is shown in the following figure:

Page 49: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 37

Using the Debugging (Tracing) FeatureUnder the direction of BakBone Technical Support (page 6), you can turn on or offthe debugging (tracing) feature. This feature allows you to record the activities of theNetVault software in a file you can send to BakBone Technical Support for analysis.

Turning on debugging1. Exit all open NetVault GUI windows.

2. Open the NetVault Configurator and select the Generate debugging filescheck box on the General tab.

3. Click Apply.

4. Click the Service tab of the NetVault Configurator.

5. Click the Stop NetVault button and then click the Start NetVault button.

A trace sub-directory is created in the NetVault6 directory. Trace log files areautomatically created and updated as NetVault is used to track NetVaultactivities.

Turning off debugging1. Exit all open NetVault GUI windows.

2. Open the NetVault Configurator and clear the Generate debugging files checkbox on the General tab.

3. Click Apply.

4. Click the Service tab of the NetVault Configurator.

5. Click the Stop NetVault button and then click the Start NetVault button.

Sending the File to BakBone Technical SupportWhen you have finished capturing the NetVault activities and the file is complete,send the file to BakBone Technical Support for analysis. The following tips willassure that the file is properly received:

� Reduce the size of the file by zipping (or compressing) it.

� Upload the file to the FTP site (ftp www.netvault.co.uk).

� Make every effort to refrain from sending the file in email. Because of theusually large size of these files you can overload the email system, causingthe arrival of the file to fail.

� If you have any questions about the trace procedures, contact TechnicalSupport (page 6).

NOTE: Trace files can become large quickly. Remember to turn offdebugging as soon as the facility is no longer needed.

Page 50: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

38 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

Configuring NetVault 6.x

Configuring a SCSI LUN for a Linux kernelIf you are using an autoloader with a SCSI LUN, you must modify your operatingsystem kernel. The kernel’s configuration needs to be set up before you beginconfiguring NetVault. Here is a list of autoloaders that use LUNs.

� HP SureStor DAT - 6 slot autoloader (12000E, 24x6, 40x6)

� Sony TSL-A300C/A500C (AIT 1/2/4 slot)

� Sony TSL-9000/11000 (DAT, 8-slot)

� Seagate DDS4 Autoloader

Setting up the kernelThe following instructions define how to set up the kernel to increase the number ofSCSI LUN’s Linux will scan:

1. Make a backup copy of /etc/lilo.conf (e.g. cp /etc/lilo.con /etc/lilo.conf.bak).

2. Modify the /etc/lilo.conf file. Use the default Linux kernel setting of LUN 0. Ifyou’d like your operating system to use LUN 1 or higher, you’ll need to changethe configuration file (/etc/lilo.conf) as follows:

boot=/dev/hda5

map=/boot/map

install=/boot/boot.b

prompt

timeout=50

image=/boot/vmlinux-2.0.36-3

label=redhat5

root=/dev/hda5

initrd=/boot/initrd-2.0.36-3.img

read-only

append=”max_scsi_luns=8”

3. Add the line to the end of the file using a text editor such as vi. For example, ifyou specify max_scsi_luns=8, NetVault allows Linux to recognize up to 8 LUNs(e.g. LUNs 0 through 7).

4. Update lilo using the command:

CAUTION: Modifying the kernel on your system can cause boot problems.

Page 51: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 39

# lilo

5. Reboot your system.

6. Confirm that the modification has been completed. The kernel automaticallyrecognizes the SCSI device when rebooting. You can also confirm the changesusing the Dmesg command after rebooting.

An example of the output of the Dmesg command is shown in the followingfigure:

Uninstalling NetVault

Uninstalling NetVault from Windows NT Machines1. Choose Start>Programs>NetVault >Uninstall NetVault.

2. InstallShield will remove the Software Services, etc. If desired, click Yes toremove the shared library files located in %SystemRoot%\System32 directory.No other applications should be using these files.

3. Remove the ~NetVault6 installation directory.

NOTE: For more information on Linux SCSI settings, see Linux’s “SCSI-HOWTO.txt” document.

CAUTION: Uninstalling NetVault Software will remove all NetVault Databaseentries. This will result in loss of all backup records performed with NetVault.

…··??…·

(scsi0) <Adaptec AHA-294X Ultra SCSI host adapter> found at PCI 15/0(scsi0) Wide Channel, SCSI ID=7, 16/255 SCBs(scsi0) Warning - detected auto-termination(scsi0) Please verify driver detected settings are correct.(scsi0) If not, then please properly set the device termination(scsi0) in the Adaptec SCSI BIOS by hitting CTRL-A when prompted(scsi0) during machine bootup.(scsi0) Cables present (Int-50 NO, Int-68 NO, Ext-68 YES)(scsi0) Downloading sequencer code... 419 instructions downloadedscsi0 : Adaptec AHA274x/284x/294x (EISA/VLB/PCI-Fast SCSI) 5.1.7/3.2.4

<Adaptec AHA-294X Ultra SCSI host adapter>scsi : 1 hosts.Vendor: SONY Model: TSL-A300C Rev: L202Type: Sequential-Access ANSI SCSI revision: 02

(scsi0:0:1:0) Synchronous at 20.0 Mbyte/sec, offset 8.Vendor: SONY Model: TSL-A300C Rev: L202Type: Medium Changer ANSI SCSI revision: 02

Page 52: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

40 Chapter 2Managing NetVault Software

Uninstalling NetVault from Solaris or MP-RAS Machines1. Type pkgrm nv6server to remove a NetVault Server Installation, or type

pkgrm nv6client to remove a NetVault Client.

2. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the software.

Uninstalling NetVault from other UNIX or Linux Installations1. Use the cd command to go to the NetVault installation directory, then go to the

<path>/netvault6/util directory.

2. Type ./nvuninstall at the command prompt.

3. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the software.

Page 53: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 3

NetVault BasicsGraphical User Interface - 43

� Menu Bar - 43� Command Toolbar - 45� Status Line - 46

Managing Devices and Clients - 46

� Device Management Window - 47� Client Management Window - 48� Domain Management Window - 48

Managing Media - 49

� Media Management Window - 50� Status Window - 50

Backing Up Data - 51

� Backup Window - 52

Restoring Backed Up Data - 53

� Restore Window - 53

Job Operations - 54

� Jobs Window - 54� Logs Window - 55

Using Templates - 56

� Policy Management Window - 56

Searching for Data - 57

Selecting Items - 58

Page 54: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 55: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 43

Graphical User Interface

The NetVault Graphical User Interface provides access to a variety of windows used tomanage your hardware and software configurations, and storage.

The main window of the interface appears, as shown in the following figure, when you startNetVault:

The interface contains the menu bar, the command toolbars and the status line which areexplained in this section. Information about the windows opened by these commands can befound in Managing Devices and Clients (page 46).

Menu BarThe NetVault menu bar, shown in the following figure, provides access to theNetVault functions and operations.

The commands available in each menu item are detailed in the following table:

MenuChoose thiscommand:

To do this:

File Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box whereyou can select the desired printer andspecify its properties.

Exit Close all open windows and dialogboxes and exit the program.

Page 56: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

44 Chapter 3NetVault Basics

View Toolbar Turn on or off the display of the com-mand toolbar containing shortcut but-tons to the menu commands.

Large Buttons Turn on or off the display of the largeicon shortcuts to the menu commands.

Font Open the Font dialog box where youcan change font and font size.

Operations Backup Open the Backup window where youcan select items for backup, schedulejobs and set job options.

Restore Open the Restore window where youcan select backed up items to berestored, schedule jobs and set joboptions.

Status Open the Status window where youcan monitor device, client and job sta-tus and view operator messages.

Media management Open the Media window where youcan view details on media items.

Job management Open the Job window where informa-tion is stored about jobs, their statusand job histories.

Logs Open the Log window where you canaccess log files.

Administration Client Management Open the Client Management windowwhere you can view and find informa-tion on the NetVault Clients and Avail-able NetVault Machines.

Domain Management Open the Domain Management win-dow where you can view and find infor-mation on the Controlled Servers andAvailable NetVault Servers.

Device Management Open the Device Management windowwhere you can view logs and mediarequests for your devices.

MenuChoose thiscommand:

To do this:

Page 57: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 45

Command ToolbarThe command toolbar, when displayed, is located directly below the menu bar in theNetVault interface and consists of shortcut buttons providing access to commonlyused commands. These shortcut buttons can be displayed in two sizes: the smallbuttons on the command toolbar or as large buttons in the interface.

The display of the command toolbar can be turned on or off by choosing the ViewToolbar command. The display of the large command buttons is turned on or off bychoosing the View Large Buttons command.

The NetVault command toolbar (small buttons) appears as shown in the followingfigure:

The NetVault GUI (large buttons) appears as shown:

Policy Management Opens the Policy Management win-dow where you can define sets ofoptions for schedules, target mediaand advanced options (backup life,compression, verification, duplicationand pre and post scripting).

Help Help Contents Display a description of and help forthe current focus item.

Help Index Display the Help Index.

About Open the About dialog box showingproduct version number and licenseinformation.

MenuChoose thiscommand:

To do this:

Page 58: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

46 Chapter 3NetVault Basics

The shortcut buttons, accessible from either the command toolbar or the largebuttons, are described in the following table:

Status LineThe Status Line, located at the bottom of the NetVault window, displays a descriptionof the command over which the cursor is currently placed.

An example of the information displayed when the cursor hovers over the MediaManagement command button, is shown in the following figure:

Managing Devices and Clients

The NetVault interface includes windows which allow you to manage your clients, domainsand devices. This section gives a brief description of the windows used to manage thedevices, clients and client domains.

Click thisbutton

For this command:

Operations Backup

Operations Restore

Administration Client Management

Administration Device Management

Operations Status

Operations Media Management

Operations Job Management

Operations Logs

Page 59: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 47

Device Management WindowAll backup devices (including simple tape drives, tape libraries, disk-based pseudo-libraries, CD Writers, Optical Drives, etc.) are controlled by a NetVault server.Devices can be attached directly to the NetVault server computer or be distributedamong the clients of the NetVault server. The NetVault Device Managementwindow provides the means to control the devices on the servers.

The NetVault Device Management window opens when you click the DeviceManagement button on the command toolbars or choose the AdministrationDevice Management command, and is shown in the following figure:

The options available on the NetVault Device Management window are:

� Server Selection: A list of servers.

� Devices: Lists the devices currently controlled by the selected NetVaultserver. Devices you intend to control through the NetVault DeviceManagement window must be added by choosing one of the Add commands.The Devices tab provides access to Library and Drive commands used tocheck status, modify libraries, remove devices, check drives, and otherfunctions used in managing the devices.

� Device Logs: A list of the log messages recorded for activity on the deviceswhich were or are currently under the control of the selected NetVault server.

� Media Requests: Contains all currently active requests for media. Once amedia request is filled as part of an active job, the media request is removed.

For complete information on using the Device Management window, see Workingwith the Device Management Window (page 64).

Page 60: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

48 Chapter 3NetVault Basics

Client Management WindowThe NetVault Client Management window allows you to monitor, control and addNetVault Clients which are controlled by a NetVault server.

The NetVault Client Management window opens when you click the ClientManagement button on the command toolbars or choose the Administration ClientManagement command, and is shown in the following figure:

The options available in the NetVault Client Management window are:

� Server Selection: A list of servers.

� Clients: An alphabetically ordered list of the current NetVault clients for theNetVault server selected in the Server Selection box.

� Available NetVault Machines: A list of the currently known NetVaultmachines on the network and their current status: blue if available, red ifunavailable.

� Find NetVault Machine: Allows you to search for a NetVault machine notcurrently listed in the Available NetVault Machines list. With this search youcan find machines located on another network connected by a router, bridge orgateway to the local network.

For complete information on using the Client Management window, see Working withthe Device Management Window (page 64).

Domain Management WindowIn NetVault network management, a single machine is configured as a NetVaultserver with one or more NetVault clients assigned to it. The server and its clientscomprise a NetVault Domain.

A server can be administered from the machine running the server software or from aremote workstation. Many servers can be administered from a central location, thus

Page 61: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 49

providing a Domain Management facility. This facility requires the installation of aNetVault GUI.

The NetVault Domain Management window opens when you choose theAdministration Domain Management command, as shown in the following figure:

The NetVault Domain Management window is similar to the NetVault ClientManagement window. The options available in the window are:

� Available NetVault Servers: The list of currently known NetVault servers onthe network and their current status: blue if available, red if unavailable. Withproper security, a server may be added as a Controlled Server.

� Controlled Servers: The list of all NetVault servers which may be controlledfrom the selected server and their current status: blue if available, red ifunavailable. With proper security, a Controlled Server can be added from theAvailable NetVault Servers frame.

� Find NetVault Machine: Allows you to search for a NetVault Server machinenot currently listed in the Available NetVault Servers frame. Use this facilityto find machines on another network connected by a router, bridge or gatewayto the local network.

For more information on using the Domain Management window, see The NetVaultDomain Management Window (page 117).

Managing Media

An important part of performing backups and restores for your data is being able to managethe media used to store the data, as well as schedule and run the backup and restore jobs.NetVault provides the windows used to supervise the performance of your media. Thissection describes those windows.

Page 62: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

50 Chapter 3NetVault Basics

Media Management WindowThe NetVault Media Management window provides access to information about themedia associated with the selected server.

The NetVault Media Management window opens when you click the MediaManagement button on the command toolbars or choose the Operations MediaManagement command, as shown in the following figure:

The options available on the NetVault Media Management window are:

� Server Selection: A list of servers.

� Media: The list of media and backup savesets on the selected server.

� Details: The tabs appearing in the Details frame vary, depending on the itemselected in the Media frame.

For selected media the tabs can include Details, Statistics, History, Library Infoand Media Requests. Each tab provides details specific to the media such aslocation, space used, segments used and date written. When a job is active italso provides information used to administer media requests.

When a backup saveset is selected, the tabs displayed are Backup, Segment 1and Segment 2. Information displayed for a selected backup saveset caninclude the name of the server which controlled the backup, the name of theclient the data was backed up from, the type of backup performed and more.

For more information see Media Management (page 127).

Status WindowThe NetVault Server Status window displays information on the current status of theselected server.

Page 63: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 51

The NetVault Jobs window opens when you click the Status button on thecommand toolbars or choose the Operations Status command. The information inthe NetVault Server Status window is divided into individual, sizable areas, asshown in the following figure:

The areas in the NetVault Server Status window are:

� Device Status: Displays the availability and state of each device on theNetVault server.

� Client Status: Displays the state of each NetVault client on the NetVaultserver.

� Job Status: Displays the state of each job controlled by the NetVault server.

� Operator Messages: Displays all messages for jobs controlled by theNetVault server.

For complete information on using the Server Status window, see The NetVaultServer Status Window (page 141).

Backing Up Data

The NetVault Backup window is where you select the data you want to back up, set backupand advanced options, choose the target media and schedule backup jobs.

Page 64: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

52 Chapter 3NetVault Basics

Backup WindowThe NetVault Backup window allows you to create, edit and submit backup jobs forNetVault clients. NetVault backup jobs transfer data from the NetVault client to abackup device whose media stores the data. The backed up data is then available tobe restored to the originating client.

The NetVault Backup window opens when you click the Backup button on thecommand toolbars or choose the Operations Backup command, as shown in thefollowing figure:

Each of the tabs in the NetVault Backup window controls the functions and optionsavailable for backup jobs. Complete information on using the NetVault Backupwindow can be found in Backing Up Data (page 157).

� Selections: Allows you to select the data you want included in the backup job.For more information on how to select specific data, see Searching for Data(page 57).

� Backup Options: Backup options vary, depending on the plugin or APMselection. These options control whether you do a full, differential orincremental backup, and if differential or incremental, specify the data you wantto include.

� Schedule: Provides the option to specify when backup jobs are run, whetherthey are run only once or are repeated at certain intervals, and whether theycan be triggered to run by a command.

� Target: Allows you to specify a particular device or media on which the datawill be backed up.

� Advanced Options: Includes the option to set backup life, data compression,verification, duplication and pre and post scripting. Additional information onthe Advanced Options is in Using Advanced Features (page 271).

Page 65: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 53

Restoring Backed Up Data

To recover backed up data, use the Restore window to select the data to be restored, setrestore and advanced options, choose the target client and schedule the restore job.

Restore WindowThe NetVault Restore window allows you to create, edit and submit restore jobs forNetVault clients. NetVault restore jobs transfer data from a backup device whosemedia stores the data to the NetVault client.

The NetVault Restore window opens when you click the Restore button on thecommand toolbars or choose the Operations Restore command, as shown in thefollowing example:

Each of the tabs in the NetVault Restore window controls the functions and optionsavailable for backup jobs. Complete information on using the Restore window canbe found in Restoring Data (page 197).

� Selections: Allows you to select the data you want included in the restore job.For more information on how to select specific data, see Searching for Data(page 57).

� Restore Options: Restore options vary, depending on the plugin or APMselection. These options control whether a restore job can overwrite existingdata, create backup files or change date and time stamps.

� Target Client: Allows you to select the client where you want the data to berestored.

Page 66: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

54 Chapter 3NetVault Basics

� Schedule: Provides the option to specify when backup jobs are run, whetherthey are run only once or are repeated at certain intervals, and whether theycan be triggered to run by a command.

� Advanced Options: Includes the option to set backup life, data compression,verification, duplication and pre and post scripting. Additional information onthe Advanced Options is in Using Advanced Features (page 271).

Job Operations

The NetVault Jobs window allows you to monitor the performance of and schedules for yourbackup and restore jobs. This same window also gives you access to historical jobinformation for completed jobs.

The Logs window is available to view job logs created during backup and restore joboperations. The job logs record what happened while the job was running, includingoperation messages issued and any warnings or errors that may have occurred. With the joblogs, problems can be identified and corrected before the same circumstances are applied tonew jobs.

Jobs WindowThe NetVault Jobs window contains information relevant to jobs submitted by theNetVault server that are completed, running and scheduled to run. The Job Managerruns on the NetVault server to monitor plugins and device managers on othermachines to complete a task.

The NetVault Jobs window opens when you click the Job Management button onthe command toolbars or choose the Operations Job Management command, asshown in the following figure:

The options available on the NetVault Jobs window are:

Page 67: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 55

� Status: The Status tab lists the completed, running and scheduled jobs.Running and scheduled jobs can be controlled by choosing differentcommands in the pop-up menus. Completed jobs can be viewed and edited.Scheduled jobs can be viewed, edited, deleted from the schedule and placedon hold. You can also monitor, view, edit and abort running jobs.

� Jobs: Displays the list of jobs in the NetVault database. Jobs listed here donot have to be active; a series of jobs can be created, saved with differentnames and submitted later.

� History: The list of all jobs that have been run.

For more information on using the Jobs window, see Job Management (page 239).

Logs WindowThe NetVault server centralizes all logs in a NetVault domain, assuring that the logsfrom the server and the clients are gathered in a single location. The NetVaultlogging utility pre-allocates disk space for the log storage so that logging continueseven if the system runs low on disk space.

The NetVault Logs window opens when you click the Logs button on the commandtoolbars or choose the Operations Logs command, as shown in the followingfigure:

Operational logging for processes controlled by the selected NetVault serverselected are listed in the NetVault Logs window.

Logs can be filtered to display only those who meet specified filter options, such asWarning Levels, date ranges, clients, etc.

For complete information on using the NetVault Logs window, see Using Logs (page249).

Page 68: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

56 Chapter 3NetVault Basics

Using Templates

In most of the backup and restore jobs that you do, the same set of options can be applied.The Policy Management window can be used to define and store sets of options that can bere-used in many of your backup and restore jobs.

Policy Management WindowNetVault allows you to define and save templates that can be re-used in manydifferent backup or restore jobs. When modifications are required they can be donein the saved template and automatically applied to the backup or restore jobs thatuse that template. The templates you design and save are called Sets.

Sets are defined in the NetVault Backup, NetVault Restore and NetVault PolicyManagement windows from the appropriate tabs. The following list shows theavailable sets:

� Schedule Set: Defines the date and time the job is to run and whether it runsonce or repeats many times. This set can be applied to both Backup andRestore jobs.

� Backup Selection Set: Used in selection of data to be backed up.

� Backup Target Set: Used to set the devices, media and general options forthe backup targets.

� Backup Advanced Options Set: Used to define the compression and pre andpost script options for a backup job.

� Restore Selection Set: Used in selection of backed up data to be restored.

� Restore Advanced Options Set: Used to define the compression and scriptoptions for a restore job.

Page 69: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 57

The NetVault Policy Management window is opened by choosing theAdministration Policy Management command, and appears as shown in thefollowing example with the Schedule tab displayed:

At the bottom of each tab you can name and save a Set of options and load, modifyand delete a Set you previously saved. For more information on using Save Setsand working with the Policy Management window, see Using Policy (Set) Templates(page 263).

Searching for Data

Whenever data has been backed up, it can be restored. The Search facility allows you tofind the backed up data at the client, plugin and backup saveset levels.

When you select a Client, Plugin or backup saveset, right-click and choose Search from thepopup menu, the Restore Search window opens, as shown in the following figure:

In the Restore Search dialog box, you can specify a string of characters in the SearchString box that must be present in the backed up data you want to find, use a RegularExpression Search and search for Case Sensitive characters. In addition, wildcardcharacters can be used to expand the results of your search.

For more information on Regular Expressions, see Using Regular Expressions (page 315).

Page 70: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

58 Chapter 3NetVault Basics

Selecting Items

By carefully selecting the items you want to backup or restore, you can reduce the time ittakes to run the backup and restore jobs and, subsequently, minimize the time data isunavailable to your users.

Items are selected or cleared by clicking a square located to the left of the item.

The following example shows how the individual items in a Microsoft SQL Database Backupare included or excluded by selection:

� The green check next to the master item indicates that the entire database is selected.When the green check is present at this level, all sub-items are automatically selected.

� The red X next to the spt_datatype_info and spt_datatype_info_ext items indicates thatthese items are excluded from the selection.

When selecting items, it is important to remember:

� A selection at the top, or master, level automatically selects all its sub-items andindicates the selection with a green check.

� If the master level is opened, and all sub-items selected, then the master item isautomatically selected.

� When the master level is selected (making all sub-items selected), individual sub-itemscan be excluded by clicking the green check box. The now excluded sub-item isindicated with a red X.

� If the master level is opened but not selected, individual items not selected are indicatedby the blank square.

Page 71: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 4

Device and Library ManagementWhat are NetVault Devices? - 61

� Device Types - 61� Device Connections - 61� Devices in a Windows NT Environment - 63� Shared Devices - 63� Setting up a Device - 63� Planning a Shared Device Installation - 61

Working with the Device Management Window - 64

� Menu Bar - 64� Window Tabs - 65� Icons and Drive Lights - 65� The Devices Tab - 66� The Device Logs Tab - 71� The Media Requests Tab - 72

Adding NetVault Devices - 77

� Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client - 77� Adding Libraries - 81� Adding a Shared Library - 87� Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients - 91� Adding Devices in Windows 2000 - 92� Working with Firewalls - 94� Creating Virtual Libraries - 94

Scanning Drives and Media - 94

� Scanning for Shared Drives - 94� Scanning Media - 95

Working with Cleaning Drives/Slots - 97

� Configuring Cleaning Drives/Slots - 97� Checking Status on Cleaning Drives/Slots - 98� Setting the Life of Cleaning Media - 100� Setting an Automatic Cleaning Interval - 100� Manually Cleaning Media - 101

Page 72: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 73: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 61

What are NetVault Devices?

A NetVault device is any single piece of equipment designated to store the data you need topreserve or backup.

NetVault is designed to use a wide variety of storage devices from single drives (includingdisk, tape and DVD-RAM) to libraries of the same in any combination. The majority ofNetVault devices use the SCSI (Small Computer Systems Interface) standard, and in mostcases, a device is automatically recognized as it is added. Most devices use tape media, butNetVault also works well with disk-based and optical media.

NetVault device templates simplify the way devices are added under any operating systemwhere NetVault is installed.

Device TypesNetVault devices fall into two categories:

� Simple Devices: Normally a single drive device requiring manual interventionto change media.

� Libraries: Libraries can be configured as single-drive, random tape libraries(stackers), multi-drive (random) tape libraries (jukeboxes), sequential devices,autochangers, autoloaders, disk libraries, etc.

Device ConnectionsNetVault devices are controlled by a NetVault server. They can be attached directlyto the NetVault server or distributed across the clients of the server. These devicesare known as Client Transfer Nodes (CTN). Multi-drive devices can be completelycontrolled by one NetVault server/client or shared among more than one NetVaultserver/client.

Planning a Shared Device InstallationDirecSan™ devices are NetVault devices (e.g. tape drives) that can be sharedbetween two or more machines using shared-SCSI or a SAN (Storage AreaNetwork) connection. In this section you will learn how to set up a simple shared-SCSI device between two machines, and how to use a SAN connection.

Setting up Simple Shared-SCSI Devices (2 machines)The simplest way to set up shared devices between two machines is to usestandard SCSI cabling. The information provided here is a general guide only andsubject to change. For the latest information, please contact Technical Support(page 6).

Page 74: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

62 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

Requirements for using shared-SCSI include:

� The two machines must be physically close enough to each other so that themaximum recommended cable lengths for the type of SCSI cabling in use andnumber of connections are not exceeded.

� The two machines must be running a main operating system supported byNetVault (i.e. Microsoft Windows NT, or most versions of UNIX). Note that thetwo machines DO NOT have to be running the SAME operating system.

� Each machine must contain a suitable SCSI ID configured to each SCSIAdapter Card.

� The device(s) to be used (either Standalone Drive or Library) must have SCSIIN and OUT connectors. Note that stackers, jukeboxes and autochangers areall classed as Libraries by NetVault.

� The SCSI cabling is set up to 'daisy-chain' between the SCSI Adapter Card onone machine, via all of the device SCSI connections, to the SCSI Adapter Cardon the second machine.

� Each machine must have either NetVault client or NetVault server softwareinstalled and the NetVault License purchased must allow for the requirednumber of Client Attached (distributed) Devices.

Note the following information:

� Each standalone or library drive can be added as shared by both machines, oror be configured for exclusive use by one machine.

� Each drive is seen as a local drive to the NetVault machine to which it is added.

� A library robotic arm connection must be added by NetVault to only one of thetwo machines.

Once the hardware device(s) and NetVault software installation is complete, theshared device(s) can be added to the NetVault Device Management window, bychoosing either the Add Standalone Drive or Add Library commands.

For more information on adding standalone, shared devices, see Adding a SharedStandalone Drive to a Client (page 77). Information on adding shared devices isavailable in Adding Libraries (page 81).

Using a SAN (Storage Area Network)NetVault’s DirecSan™ (Dynamic Drive Sharing) combines the ability to attachdevices to clients (Client Transfer Nodes - CTN) with SAN connections, providingcentralized tape storage and the sharing of drives (Shared CTN) within the SAN.

Once the SAN has been set up, the shared device(s) can be added to the NetVaultDevice Management window, by choosing either the Add Standalone Drive or AddLibrary command, as appropriate.

Page 75: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 63

Refer to Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a Client (page 77) or Adding Libraries(page 81).

Devices in a Windows NT EnvironmentNetVault works with the standard NT system drivers installed, but it isrecommended that fast tape drive devices be placed under NetVault’s own NTdrivers. You must assure that the SCSI addresses are correctly recognized by theBIOS and later NT when the machine is started or rebooted.

To check for system drivers installed under NT 4.0:

1. Choose Start>Settings>Control Panel.

2. Double-click the Tape Devices icon to open the Tape Devices dialog box,shown in the following figure:

The list of tape devices installed in your system is displayed.

3. Click the Drivers tab to display the tape device drivers on your system.

4. Select all of the drivers to be removed and click the Remove button.

Shared DevicesNetVault devices can be shared between two or more machines using shared-SCSI, a SAN or DirecSan connection using standalone drives and drives in alibrary.

A shared drive can be used by NetVault as a local drive while backing up the client.This allows data to be efficiently transferred via the network. Even if a drive isphysically shared between two or more machines, it can be added to NetVault forexclusive use by one machine, or shared by specific, connected machines.

Setting up a DeviceBefore you can start using NetVault, at least one device must be added. NetVaultcan use various types of media including tape and DVD-RAM for simple devices

Page 76: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

64 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

and libraries, and hard disks set up as pseudo tape libraries. Once a device is added,it appears in the NetVault Device Management window. Before trying to add a SCSItape device to NetVault, make sure that it is recognized by your operating system.

Working with the Device Management Window

The Device Management window provides access to all the commands and functionsneeded to manage your NetVault devices.

To open the Device Management window, click the Device Management button on thecommand toolbars or choose the Administration Device Management command, and isshown in the following figure:

Options available in the window are:

Menu BarThe Device Management menu bar, shown in the following figure, provides accessto the NetVault functions and operations.

NOTE: DVD-RAM devices are slow when writing to them. To improve thisprocess, NetVault compresses data before writing by default. This can beturned off in the Device Management window if desired

Page 77: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 65

The commands available in each menu item are detailed in the following table:

Window TabsInformation available in each of the tabs in the Device Management window isdescribed in the following table:

Icons and Drive LightsEach item listed in the Devices tab of the Device Management window is displayedwith a picture indicating specific information about the item. NetVault uses a

MenuChoose thiscommand:

To do this:

File Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog boxwhere you can select the desiredprinter and specify its properties.

Print Open the Print dialog box where youcan choose the desired printer andproperties before printing.

Close Close the window.

Add Add Library Add a library.

Add Standalone Drive Add a standalone drive.

View Devices Open the Devices tab.

Device Logs Open the Device Logs tab.

Media Requests Open the Media Requests tab.

Help Current Topic Display help on the current topic.

Help Contents Open the help system.

Window Tab Provides Information about:

Devices The control functions for all devices currently controlled by theNetVault server. For devices to be controlled in this area, theymust be added with the Add commands.

Device Logs Log messages for devices which are, or have been, under thecontrol of the selected NetVault server.

MediaRequests

Currently active requests for media. Once the media requesthas been satisfied as part of the job progress, the mediarequest is removed.

Page 78: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

66 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

combination of icons and colored lights that explain device types and status, asexplained in the following tables:

The Devices TabThe Devices Tab lists the libraries, drives and entry/exit ports for the selected server:

Icons Provides Information about:

Library - with status indicating light of green if functional.

Drive - with status indicating light (see Drive Lights table belowfor explanations).

Slot - Library media slot (with media identity, unless empty).

Port - Entry/Exit port enabling media to be imported orexported without opening the main library door.

Drive Lights Provides Information about:

Green Light - The drive is available and not in use.

Yellow Light - The drive is currently in use.

Red Light - The drive is not available, and there could be aproblem with it.

Page 79: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 67

Pop-up Menu CommandsThe pop-up menu commands in the Devices tab of the Device Management windowvary, depending on the item selected: library, drive or entry/exit port.

Each of the tables below describe the commands for the item selections:

Library Commands

This LibraryCommand

Does this:

Status Opens a simple Status dialog box for the library, showing itsname, machine and whether or not it is online.

Modify Opens the Modify Library window where library configurationscan be modified.

Remove(Device)

Removes a selected library or simple drive from Device Man-agement upon confirmation.

Open Door Opens the main door of the library. When the selected door isopen, this command changes to Door Closed. The DoorClosed command is used to hand the library back to NetVaultcontrol.

Open Entry/Exit

Physically removes media from or adds media to the Entry/ExitPort. When the Open Entry/Exit command is chosen, thismenu item changes to Entry/Exit Closed. The Entry/ExitClosed command is used to hand the library back to NetVaultcontrol.

Door Closed Hands the library back to NetVault control. When NetVaultgets control it checks all media in the device before allowingany other actions to be taken.NOTE: With many libraries, choosing Door Closed will closethe door without having to close it in the device control panel.

Entry/ExitClosed

Hands the library back to NetVault control. With some (but notall) libraries, you can choose the Entry/Exit Closed commandto close the port without having to close it in the device controlpanel.

Page 80: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

68 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

Drive/Slot Commands

Scan The Scan command causes NetVault to scan the selectedmedia to ensure that all backup savesets are recorded in theNetVault database. This command can be used to import anitem of media from another NetVault device (marked FOR-EIGN), including media previously in a device controlled by adifferent NetVault Server (or controlled by a previous NetVaultServer installation on the same machine). No restores can beperformed from media while it is marked FOREIGN, it must bescanned first.For more information on scanning, see View the library anddrive configurations, make any necessary modifications andclick the Save details button to store the settings. (page 92).

This Drive/SlotCommand

Does this:

Status Opens a Status dialog box for the drive with tabs containing: 1)Details showing whether or not the drive is online and whether itcontains media, 2) Media Information indicating read/writecapacities, errors and times, 3) Library Info identifying thelibrary and the physical and logical slot positions, and 4) Clean-ing describing date/time, data transferred, errors and time inuse since last cleaning (this tab appears only when a device isdesignated for cleaning).

Load Loads the media in the slot into an available drive.

Check Causes the drive to self-test. Choosing the Check commandwhen a drive is showing a red indicator often makes the driveavailable again. Useful for checking for media after it has beenloaded into a simple drive.

Clean Submits a request to NetVault to clean the selected drive; amessage confirming the clean cycle request appears. If therequest is not possible (i.e., the device is busy or offline, acleaning cartridge is unavailable, etc.) an appropriate messageis displayed.

This LibraryCommand

Does this:

Page 81: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 69

CleanProperties

Opens the Cleaning Interval dialog box where you can set oneor more of the following options to control when a drive iscleaned: the number of days between cleaning cycles, theamount of data transferred in gigabytes, the number of hours inuse, and the number of soft read/write errors encountered.

Life Opens the Cleaning Media Properties dialog box where you canset the desired number of lives (or cleaning passes) for a clean-ing device.

Configure Opens the Edit Drive dialog box where advanced configurationsettings can be changed to maximize drive performance for aparticular use and statistics gathered.

Re-use Enables the selected media to be re-used by NetVault after con-firmation. When media is marked to be re-used, it can be over-written by future backup jobs.

Blank Blanks a previously used media item after confirmation that youwill lose all data on the media.

Properties Allows you to view/edit labels for a selected media item (new orre-used). Also allows you to view the current labels and tape for-mat.NOTE: It is not possible to change the label of media in usewithout losing the data currently stored on it.

Export Transfers the selected media to the Entry/Exit Port so that it maybe removed from the library.

Unload Unloads the media from the drive to return it to its designatedslot. With a Simple Drive the media is ejected.

Media Status Opens a multi-tabbed dialog box containing comprehensiveinformation on the media status.

This Drive/SlotCommand

Does this:

Page 82: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

70 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

Entry/Exit Port Commands

Scan The Scan command causes NetVault to scan the selectedmedia to ensure that all backup savesets are recorded in theNetVault database. This command can be used to import anitem of media from another NetVault device (marked FOR-EIGN), including media previously in a device controlled by a dif-ferent NetVault Server (or controlled by a previous NetVaultServer installation on the same machine). No restores can beperformed from media while it is marked FOREIGN, it must bescanned first.For more information on scanning, see View the library anddrive configurations, make any necessary modifications andclick the Save details button to store the settings. (page 92).

This PortCommand

Does this:

Status Opens a Status dialog box for the drive with tabs containing: 1)Details showing whether or not the drive is online and whetherit contains media, 2) Statistics indicating how much data wasread/written, how many errors were read/written and when thedata was read/written, and 3) Library Info identifying thelibrary and the physical and logical slot positions.

Unload Unloads the media from the drive to return it to its designatedslot. With a Simple Drive the media is ejected.

Media Status Opens a multi-tabbed dialog box containing comprehensiveinformation on the media status.

Scan The Scan command causes NetVault to scan the selectedmedia to ensure that all backup savesets are recorded in theNetVault database. This command can be used to import anitem of media from another NetVault device (marked FOR-EIGN), including media previously in a device controlled by adifferent NetVault Server (or controlled by a previous NetVaultServer installation on the same machine). No restores can bemade from media while it is marked FOREIGN, it must bescanned first.For more information on scanning, see View the library anddrive configurations, make any necessary modifications andclick the Save details button to store the settings. (page 92).

This Drive/SlotCommand

Does this:

Page 83: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 71

The Device Logs TabThe Device Logs tab lists all log messages for the devices currently under control ofthe selected NetVault server. An example of the Device Logs tab is shown in thefollowing figure:

Information available on the Device Logs tab include:

� Log Messages: The log messages listed here are also available in theNetVault Logs window where a filter can be applied to select specific logs. Formore information on using the Logs command, see Using Logs (page 249).

� Warning Level: The color indicators used here are also used in the NetVaultJobs window. See Using Logs (page 251) for more information.

� Exclamation Marks: An exclamation mark inside the warning level dotindicates that additional information is available for the log message.

When the exclamation mark is inside the dot of a Backup job, and you double-click it, the Transfer Information dialog box opens:

Page 84: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

72 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

When you double-click an error dot, the View Log Context dialog box opens:

The Media Requests TabMedia Request messages are displayed when a job is active. Normally, when a jobcompletes successfully, the Media Request disappears. If a problem is encountered,the job is paused until the media request is fulfilled. For instance, a Media Requestsoccurs when you have used Target Media during a backup job and the specifiedmedia is not available to the device.

Media Requests are identified with both a Request number and the related Jobnumber. In addition, the Priority Number and any relevant message concerning themedia request is displayed.

The Media Requests tab is shown in the following figure:

Page 85: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 73

The commands available when you right-click a media request are described in thefollowing table:

Media Request Status Dialog BoxWhen a Media Request is selected, and the Status command chosen from the pop-up menu, the Media Request Status dialog box opens:

Media RequestCommand

Does this:

Status Opens the Media Request Status dialog box to view the statis-tics of the job’s request for media. For more information, seeMedia Request Status Dialog Box (page 73).

Diagnose Opens the Diagnose Media Request dialog box to view infor-mation about how the media request is set up. For more infor-mation, see

Put on HoldTake off Hold

Places the job on hold.Removes the hold, placing the job back in the queue.

Set Priority Opens the Set Request Priority dialog box where you canchange the priority level for the selected job, see Set PriorityDialog Box (page 76). For more information on setting defaultpriority levels, see Setting Default Priorities (page 76).

Page 86: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

74 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

The above example provides information for a backup job. Each item is explained inthe following table:

InformationItem

Explanation

Request The identifying number for the media request.

Request type Whether the media request is for a backup or a restore.

Status The current status of the job. This example shows that there isNo Suitable Media Available. This could mean that the TargetMedia is not in the device.

Priority The priority assigned to the media request.

Job The related Job Number.

RequestingMachine

The NetVault machine requesting the media.

Drives Specifies which drive(s) the media request applies to. In thisexample, the backup may only use a library drive (the DLTdrive within the Exabyte EXB-210), so only this library drive islisted.

Media Specifies which media the media request applies to. In thisexample, the backup targeted specific media - New DLT Tape4. This is the Media Label (MID) of the media which is requiredfor the backup.

Re-use media Allows you to designate the selected media for re-use.

Requiredamount ofmedia

Details the setting of Backup - Target, General Options settingSpecify minimum space required on media before backup.In this example, this parameter is not set.

Force firstbackup

Details whether or not the Backup - Target, General Optionssetting Ensure this backup is the first on the media wasspecified.

Labelautomatically

Details whether or not the Backup - Target, Media Optionsoption Automatically label new or reused media was turnedon.

Mark mediaread-only oncompletion

Details whether or not the Backup - Target, General Optionsoption Protect media from further writes after backup wasturned on.

Page 87: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 75

Diagnose Media Request Dialog BoxWhen a Media Request is selected, and the Diagnose command chosen from thepop-up menu, the Diagnose Media Request dialog box opens:

The above example provides information for a backup job. Each item is explained inthe table in Media Request Status Dialog Box (page 73).

Use mediaformat

Under normal circumstances, this parameter is set to Default,meaning that any media format can be used. When a mediaformat is specified (i.e., MTF), and a backup needs to spanmore than one item of media, if the first item of media usesMTF, then all others must also use MTF. A backup job cannotuse mixed media formats.

Return mediato slot oncompletion

This parameter applies only to media in libraries. If the LibraryReturn inactive media to slot delay parameter is set (in theAdd Library - Configure dialog box or by choosing the Config-ure command on a selected library), the parameter specified isdisplayed here.

Force localdrive

Currently not available.

NetworkCompression

Details whether or not the Backup - Advanced Options, Com-pression setting Network Compression has been specified.

InformationItem

Explanation

Page 88: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

76 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

Set Priority Dialog BoxWhen a Media Request is selected, and the Set Priority command chosen from thepop-up menu, the Set Priority dialog box opens:

The Set Priority dialog box allows you to change the priority of the selected job.NetVault backup and restore jobs are run in order of priority. Decrease the priority ofa job to move it forward in the queue.

Setting Default PrioritiesDefault priority values are set in the NetVault Configurator, and are as follows:

The following information applies to the types of priorities:

� For Restore, Backup, Label and Blank requests, 1 is the highest level and 0runs the request in the background.

� A Continuation request occurs when an unfinished Restore or Backup jobrequires more than one piece of media to complete successfully. It is possiblefor a job paused for media changes to be pre-empted by another request. Inorder to allow the original Restore or Backup request to continue withoutinterruption, set the priority number of the continuation Restore or Backup to asmaller number than that of other requests.

Types of PrioritiesPriorityNumber

Restore Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 20

Continuation Restore Request Priority Boost 5

Backup Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 30

Continuation Backup Request Priority Boost 5

Label Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10

Blank Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10

Page 89: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 77

Adding NetVault Devices

This section includes instructions on how to add devices to NetVault. You will learn how toplan and add a shared standalone device, search for shared devices and add a sharedlibrary.

Adding a Shared Standalone Drive to a ClientThis section teaches you how to add a standalone drive connected to two or moreclients to NetVault.

The example used here demonstrates how to add a single Quantum DLT 7000 driveto two clients (rabbit and pinky). These two clients are connected to the drive viashared-SCSI. One of the clients is running Windows NT while the other is runningthe Sun Solaris operating system. The rabbit client is the NetVault Server for thisNetVault Domain.

The NetVault Server (rabbit) has no added devices when you begin, and no backupjobs can be run.

To add a drive, follow these steps:

1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the DeviceManagement button on the command toolbars or by choosing theAdministration Device Management command, as shown in the followingfigure:

Page 90: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

78 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

2. Choose Add>Add Standalone Drive to open the Add Standalone Drivewindow, shown in the following figure:

The Add Standalone Drive window contains these options:

� Choose Drives: A list of the devices already connected to or available to beconnected to the NetVault client.

� Selected Drives - Displays a photograph of the added device, or a photographof the generic type, as listed in the Type field.

� Details: Displays a basic description of the device’s capabilities.

� Save details button: Click this button to store the added device.

� Remove Drive: Click this button to delete a selected drive.

� File Menu: Accesses the Save, Print Setup, Print and Close commands.

� Help Menu: Opens the help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page.

3. Select the client rabbit, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu.

The available standalone drives for the client are displayed in the ChooseDrives list. The SCSI ID and device string for the drive are displayed.

4. Select the desired drive, right-click and choose Add Shared from the pop-upmenu. If this is the first client selection for this drive only, choose Select to addthe drive to the drive bay.

Page 91: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 79

The drive has been added for the first client. Normally the picture displayed inthe Selected Drives frame and the information in the Type box match yourdrive.

5. Add the same drive to the second client using one of the following methods:

� Manually add the drive as shared for an additional client. Select an additionalNetVault client physically connected to this drive via shared-SCSI or a SAN,right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu. The drive is listed underthe selected client.

� Let NetVault automatically add all shared drives.

6. Right-click the drive and choose Add Shared from the pop-up menu:

Page 92: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

80 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

The drive has been added to the second client, as shown in the following figure:

7. Select the Standalone Drive and right-click to open the pop-up menu. Thecommands available are:

� Configure: Click the Configure tab or select the desired drive, right-click andchoose Configure from the pop-up menu to access the Configuration settings.For this example, there are no configuration settings.

� Scan for shared drives: Choose Scan for shared drives from the pop-upmenu to automatically detect and add any other clients sharing the drive. SeeScanning for Shared Drives (page 94) for more information.

If you select a drive, the pop-up menu adds the Remove command so that theselected drive can be deleted.

8. Enter a suitable Device Name in the box. You cannot use a default name whena drive is shared.

9. After viewing the configuration, and changing any options as necessary, savethe settings for the added device by clicking the Save details button.

NOTE: You can manually add a drive to any number of clients connected to it.

Page 93: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 81

The NetVault - Information dialog box message appears:

The new drive appears in the NetVault Device Management window and startsto initialize. At first the drive containing media is displayed with UNKNOWN forthe media and the yellow drive light, indicating it is being checked by NetVault.

After the media has been checked, the drive light turns green.

New media, or media previously blanked, is listed as BLANK.

Media already in use under NetVault is listed with the Media Label it has beenallocated. This will be prefixed with FOREIGN: if it is not known by your currentNetVault database; if you wish to use this media, you will need to scan it. Forinformation on scanning for shared devices, see Scanning for Shared Drives(page 94).

Media which has been used under NetVault 5 will be marked as NetVault5 NT(or other OS).

Media Formatted in some other manner will normally be marked as OTHER.

Adding LibrariesAll Libraries to be controlled by a NetVault server are added via the Add Librarywindow. A library can be added to the NetVault server itself as a client, or whenusing the Client Transfer Node facility, to a NetVault client controlled by theNetVault server.

The example below explains how to add an Exabyte 18D Library, with singleQuantum DLT 4000 drive, to a NetVault Client (richard) which is also the NetVaultserver.

Before adding the device, the NetVault server does not have any devices added (sono backup can be run).

To add a library:

1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the DeviceManagement button on the command toolbars or by choosing theAdministration Device Management command.

Page 94: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

82 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

2. Choose Add Library to open the Add Library window, shown in the followingfigure:

The Add Library window contains the following options:

� Library Selection tab: Displays the list of NetVault clients to which librariesare connected, and shows the libraries available to be added.

� Drive Selection tab: Displays the list of NetVault clients to which drives areconnected, and shows the drives available to be added. The correct drive foreach library drive bay must be selected.

� Configure tab: Displays an overview of the complete library configuration andallows additional configuration to be set up using library (arm changer) anddrive pop-up menus.

� Save details: Stores the Library configuration modifications.

3. Select the client having the Library you want to add (for this example, select therichard client).

Page 95: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 83

4. Right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu, shown in the followingexample, or double-click the client.

The available libraries for the client are displayed in the Choose Device frame.NetVault normally displays the SCSI ID and device string for the library (armchanger).

5. Select the library, right-click and choose Select from the pop-up menu.

The library picture, Type and Details are displayed in the Selected Libraryframe and the library (arm changer mechanism) is selected.

6. Click the Drive Selection tab.

7. Select the NetVault Client (richard) in the Choose Drives frame.

Page 96: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

84 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

8. Right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu to display the librariesavailable to be added to the selected NetVault server’s control.

9. Display the list of drives available to be added to the selected server’s control bychoosing the Open command from the pop-up menu for the selected NetVaultClient.

Page 97: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 85

10. Select the desired drive, right-click and choose Select from the pop-up menu:

The drive is now added. The equipment picture in the Selected Drives frameand the Type will match the particular library. For a library with multiple drives,repeat the last step for each drive you want to add.

IMPORTANT: If a library has more than one drive, the correct drive bay foreach drive must be selected in the Select for drive bay box before selectingthe drive to be added. In the example above, only one of the four drives fittedto this library is connected by SCSI, so only one SCSI Tape drive appears.

IMPORTANT: When adding multiple drives to a library, the drive order iscritical. Make sure the correct drive bays are used for each added drive.

Page 98: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

86 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

11. Click the Configure tab or select the library (arm changer) and/or drive(s), right-click and choose Configure from the pop-up menu, as shown in the followingfigure:

12. Click the Save Details button to save the library configuration.

The NetVault - Information dialog box displays a message that the library wasadded:

The new library is displayed in the NetVault Device Management window andinitialization is begun. At first, only the library and drive(s) are displayed. As eachslot is initialized it is shown with a media of UNKNOWN.

Page 99: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 87

Other media types are:

� Blank: New media or media previously blank.

� Foreign: Media already used under NetVault is displayed with the MediaLabel it has been allocated. This will be prefixed with FOREIGN: if it is notknown by your current NetVault database; if you wish to use this media, youwill need to scan it.

� NetVault5 NT (or other OS): Media used under NetVault 5.

� Other: Media formatted in some other manner.

Adding a Shared LibraryThis section demonstrates how a Shared Library (Dynamic Drive Sharing) using alibrary with the arm-changer under the control of one client, but with one or moredrive(s) connected to two clients, is added to NetVault.

In this example, an ADIC FastStore Library, with a single Quantum DLT 7000 drivefitted, is added to two clients (rabbit and pinky). These two clients are connected tothe device via shared-SCSI and are running different operating systems (MicrosoftWindows NT and Sun Solaris, respectively). Note that the client rabbit is theNetVault server for this NetVault domain.

Before adding the device, the NetVault server (rabbit) does not have any devicesadded, so no backups can be run.

DirecSan™, NetVault’s Shared Client Transfer Node (SCTN) also uses this featureto support centralized tap library/device sharing when attached to a SAN.

Adding Library and Drive(s) for the First Client (rabbit)1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the Device

Management button on the command toolbars by choosing the AdministrationDevice Management command.

Page 100: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

88 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

2. Open Add Library to open the Add Library window:

3. Select the first client (rabbit) which will control the Library Armchanger.

4. Choose Open from the pop-up menu.

The available libraries for the client are displayed in the Choose Library frame.NetVault displays the SCSI ID and device string for the library (arm changer).

5. Select the library, right-click and choose Select from the pop-up menu, shown inthe following figure:

Page 101: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 89

The Library (arm changer mechanism) is selected. The library picture, Type andDetails are displayed in the Selected Library window.

6. Click the Drive Selection tab.

7. Select the NetVault client in the Choose Drives frame of the Drive Selectiontab.

8. Right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu to display the librariesavailable to be added to the selected NetVault server’s control.

9. Select the NetVault client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menuto display the drives available to be added to the selected NetVault server’scontrol.

IMPORTANT: If a library has more than one drive, the correct drive bay foreach drive must be selected in the Select for drive bay box before selectingthe drive to be added. In the example above, only one of the four drives fittedto this library is connected by SCSI, so only one Scsi Tape drive appears.

Page 102: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

90 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

10. Select the desired drive in the Choose Drives frame of the Drive Selection tab,right-click and choose Add Shared from the pop-up menu, as shown in thefollowing figure:

If this is the first client selection for this drive only, choose Select to add the driveto the drive bay.

The drive has been added for the first client. Note that the picture underSelected Drives, and the information shown in the Type box, match yourparticular library. For a library with multiple drives, repeat the last step for eachlibrary drive to be added to the first client.

11. Add the same drive to the second client using one of the following methods:

� Manually add the drive as shared for an additional client. Select a NetVaultclient physically connected to this drive via shared-SCSI or SAN, right-click andchoose Open from the pop-up menu. The drive appears under this client.Continue this procedure with the steps in Manually Adding Shared Drives forOther Clients (page 91).

� Let NetVault add all shared drives automatically. Continue with this procedureusing the steps in Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients (page 91).

WARNING: When adding multiple drives to a library, the drive order iscritical. Make sure the correct drive bays are used for each added drive.

Page 103: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 91

View the library and drive configurations, make any necessary modificationsand click Save to store the settings.

Manually Adding Shared Drives for Other Clients1. Make sure that the correct drive bay is selected in the Select for drive bay box.

2. Select the drive, right-click and choose Add Shared, as shown in the followingfigure:

The drive is added to the second client, as shown in the following figure:

Page 104: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

92 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

3. Click the Configure tab or select the library (arm changer) and/or drive(s), right-click and choose Configure to change the configuration settings:

4. View the library and drive configurations, make any necessary modifications andclick the Save details button to store the settings.

Adding Devices in Windows 2000Devices or libraries being added to a Windows 2000 operating system cannot beunder the control of the Windows 2000 Remote Storage Manager.

To remove the library from the RSM control, follow these steps:

1. Right-click My Computer on your desktop.

2. Choose Manage from the pop-up menu, as shown in the following figure:

3. Double-click each level in the tree to display the desired device.

NOTE: You can manually add a drive to as many clients as are connected toit.

Page 105: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 93

4. Right-click the device and choose Properties as shown in the followingexample, to open the Properties dialog box:

5. In the Properties dialog box, clear the Enable library option as shown in thefollowing figure:

Page 106: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

94 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

6. Click Apply and then OK to exit the dialog box.

Working with FirewallsNetVault provides the ability to identify ports through which data can be transferredacross a secured network firewall. Simply enter a comma or dash-separated list ofvalid port ID’s in the Valid Ports for Devices box on the Fire Wall tab of the NetVaultConfigurator. The port identification must be configured on the machines withattached devices.

Creating Virtual LibrariesYour NetVault installation CD includes software that allows you to create virtuallibraries and associated disk devices. Appendix E, Creating Virtual Libraries (page329), contains information on how to load the software and then create the library.

Scanning Drives and Media

NetVault provides a scanning feature to help you find and add shared drives as well as findmedia that you can use to import from a different server. This section explains each of thesefunctions.

Scanning for Shared DrivesAfter a drive has been added, you can direct NetVault to find and add all shareddrives for the library. To do so:

1. Select the desired library.

2. Right-click and choose Scan for shared drives from the pop-up menu:

The NetVault - Working dialog box informs you that NetVault is scanning.

Page 107: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 95

Please wait while the scanning function completes. You would NOT normallyclick Cancel. When the scan is complete, a message appears indicating thatthe scan is complete:

When NetVault machines with this device attached are found, they aredisplayed in the NetVault Working dialog box. In the above example, a machineidentified as /dev/nvscsi/SCTL020 (HP C1533A) was found.

3. Click OK to close the dialog box.

4. Click the Configure tab to view the clients that can control the drive(s).

5. After viewing the configuration, and changing any options as necessary, savethe settings by clicking the Save details button.

Scanning MediaIf you want to import NetVault media from a different NetVault server (or a previousinstallation of your current NetVault server), you may do so using the Scan function.

The Scan function is also useful when you encounter problems with your media.You may be advised that the media needs scanning on the Details tab of the MediaProperties dialog box.

To scan media:

1. Open the NetVault Device Management window by clicking the DeviceManagement button on the command toolbars or by choosing theAdministration Device Management command.

Clients that control drives

Page 108: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

96 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

2. Make sure that the media is in a drive or library slot. In the following example, themedia is a tape inserted into a simple drive:

The media is displayed as FOREIGN if it is unknown to the NetVault Database ofyour installation.

3. Select the drive or library slot containing the media, right-click and choose Scanfrom the pop-up menu:

Page 109: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 97

The media will be scanned and details of the backups contained on it will beadded to the current NetVault Database. The word FOREIGN should now beremoved and the drive light should return to green.

The media is now available for use in a backup or restore.

Working with Cleaning Drives/Slots

You can designate cleaning drives and slots in NetVault, set up an automatic cleaning cycleand determine how many times it can be used for cleaning. Operators can also manuallytrigger cleaning and view information about these activities in the Logs.

In this section you will learn how to configure a cleaning drive/slot and where to go to set upand view cleaning options.

Configuring Cleaning Drives/SlotsA drive or slot can be designated as a cleaning drive/slot when added or bymodifying an existing one. A cleaning drive/slot cannot be used for any otherpurpose. If you dedicate cleaning slots, make sure it is noted to prevent attempts touse that slot for other operations.

To configure a drive/slot, follow these steps:

1. Open the Device Management window by clicking the Device Managementbutton on the toolbar or by choosing the Administration Device Managementcommand.

2. Right-click the desired library and choose Modify to open the Modify Librarydialog box.

3. Click the Configure tab to display the drives and slots in the library.

NOTE: When using shared drives, it is recommended that you set upcleaning abilities on only one client.

Page 110: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

98 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

4. Right-click the library, again, and choose Configure to open the ConfigureDevice dialog box.

5. Click the Cleaning tab, as shown in the following figure:

6. Enter the appropriate information. Generally you would choose one of thefollowing methods:

� Barcode Prefix(es) of cleaning media: Enter one or more (separated bycommas) barcode prefixes to identify the tapes used for cleaning.

� Cleaning Slots: Enter the identification of the slots you want to use forcleaning. You can enter one or more (separated by commas).

7. Click OK to save the changes, exit the Configure Device dialog box and return tothe Modify Library dialog box.

8. Click the Save details button to commit the changes.

Checking Status on Cleaning Drives/SlotsTo check the status of a cleaning drive, follow these steps:

1. Open the Device Management window.

2. Right-click the desired drive and choose Status to open the Status dialog box.

NOTE: If you want to remove the cleaning ability from a slot, open theConfigure Device dialog box and clear the entry in the Cleaning Slots box.

Page 111: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 99

3. Click the Cleaning tab for information, as shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Status dialog box, Cleaning tab, includes:

� Date Last Cleaned

� Time Since Last Clean

� Times Cleaned

� Data Transferred Since Last Clean

� Time in Use Since Last Clean

� Soft Errors Since Last Clean

4. Click OK to exit the dialog box.

To check the status of a cleaning slot, follow these steps:

1. With the Device Management window open, right-click the desired cleaning slotand choose Status to open the Status dialog box, shown in the following figure:

Information available in the slot’s Status dialog box, includes:

� Name

� Physical slot position

� Logical slot position

� Locked by

This information is available for all slots.

Page 112: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

100 Chapter 4Device and Library Management

Setting the Life of Cleaning MediaA cleaning slot can be used a specific number of times. You can designate thenumber of times, or life, of a piece of cleaning media.

To set the life of cleaning media, follow these steps:

1. Open the Device Management window.

2. Right-click the desired cleaning slot and choose Life to open the Cleaning MediaProperties dialog box, as shown in the following figure:

3. Click the up and down arrows (or enter the number) until the number of Livesyou want appears in the box.

4. Click OK to commit the change and exit the dialog box.

Setting an Automatic Cleaning IntervalAutomatic cleaning routines can be easily defined in NetVault.

To set up an automatic cleaning interval, follow these steps:

1. Open the Device Management window.

2. Right-click the cleaning drive and choose Clean Properties to open theCleaning Interval dialog box, shown in the following figure:

In the Cleaning Interval dialog box you can set one or more options, asdescribed below:

� Days: The number of days between cleanings.

� Data Transferred (Gb): The amount of data transferred in gigabytes.

� Hours of Use: The number of hours the media has been in use.

Page 113: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 101

� Soft Read/Write Errors (x100): The number (in hundreds) of soft read/writeerrors that have occurred.

Cleaning occurs when any one of the set options is encountered. For instance,if you set the number of Days to 3, cleaning happens every third day. If youwant to clean media after a specific number of hours in use, set the Hours ofUse to that number. If all the options are set, cleaning occurs when that criteriais met.

3. Click OK to commit the specified options and exit the dialog box.

Manually Cleaning MediaAn operator can request media cleaning manually.

To submit a request to clean media, follow these steps:

1. Open the Device Management window.

2. Right-click the desired drive and choose Clean.

3. If there is nothing to keep the cleaning from occurring, a Clean Drive dialogappears confirming the request, as shown in the following figure:

4. Click OK to exit the dialog box and return to the Device Management window.

Page 114: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 115: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 5

Client ManagementClient Management - 105

The Client Management Window - 105

� Using the Available NetVault Machines List Box - 106� Using the Clients List Box - 107� Using Find NetVault Machine - 108

Adding a NetVault Client - 111

Page 116: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 117: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 105

Client Management

All NetVault clients for the Server Selection are controlled by a NetVault server using theNetVault Client Management window, shown in the following figure:

The NetVault Client Management window is used to monitor, control, and add the NetVaultclients under the control of a NetVault server, as chosen from the Server Selection list.

The list of machines that have NetVault loaded are automatically detected on the networkand displayed under Available NetVault Machines. Any machine on the network, includingother NetVault Servers, can be added as a client to the selected server.

The Client Management Window

The NetVault Client Management window contains the following options:

� Server Selection: Displays the selected NetVault server and contains a list of serversthat were added to the domain.

� Available NetVault Machines: Displays a list of all currently known NetVault machineson the network, along with their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable).Available machines may be added as NetVault clients to the selected NetVault server.

� Clients: Lists all current NetVault clients of the selected NetVault server in alphabeticalorder with the most currently added client at the top of the list.

� Find NetVault Machine: Allows a search to be made for a NetVault machine notcurrently listed in the Available NetVault Machines area. This function is used to find

Page 118: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

106 Chapter 5Client Management

machines located on another network connected by a router, bridge or gateway to thelocal network.

� File Menu: Provides access to the Close command used to close the window.

� Help Menu: Accesses help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page.

Using the Available NetVault Machines List BoxThe Available NetVault Machines list box displays a list of all currently knownNetVault machines on the network, along with their current status (blue for available,red for unavailable). Available machines may be added as NetVault clients to theselected NetVault server.

IconsThe Available NetVault Machines list box indicates the status of NetVault machinesusing the following icons:

Icon Indicates:

Available NetVault machine with NetVault password protec-tion. This machine may be added as a NetVault client.

Available NetVault machine without NetVault password pro-tection. You may add this client without providing a password.

Unavailable NetVault machine. This is usually a machinewith NetVault installed, but is currently powered-off, or bootedwith a different operating system than used for the NetVaultinstallation.

(blue)

(blue)

(red)

Page 119: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 107

Pop-up Menu Commands

Using the Clients List BoxThe Clients list box displays an alphabetically ordered list of all current NetVaultclients for the selected NetVault server, along with their current status (blue foravailable, red for unavailable).

IconsThe Clients list box displays the status of NetVault clients using the following icons:

Choose thisCommand:

To do this:

Add As Client Add the machine as a client to the selected NetVault server.

Remove Remove the machine from the NetVault server.

Show Details Open a dialog box which displays information about theselected NetVault machine.

Icon Indicates:

Available NetVault Client with NetVault password protection.This is normally a temporary state while the client is beingadded; once the client has been successfully added, the key isremoved. It can also occur if the NetVault Password has beenchanged for the client since it was added.

Available NetVault Client which has been successfullyadded. The blue icon does not necessarily mean that theNetVault server has good access to this client; if you are indoubt as to how efficient the access is, right-click the client,then choose Check Access.

(blue)

(blue)

Page 120: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

108 Chapter 5Client Management

Pop-up Menu Commands

Using Find NetVault MachineYou can search for a NetVault machine not currently listed in the Available NetVaultMachines list box using Find NetVault Machine. Normally, all NetVault machineson the local network are listed. With Find NetVault Machine, you can find a NetVaultmachine on a different network (connected via a router, bridge, or gateway) and addit to the list.

Unavailable NetVault Client. This is often a machine withNetVault installed that is currently switched off, or bootedunder a different operating system from the one containing theNetVault installation.

Choose thisCommand:

To do this:

Properties Open the Client Properties dialog box which displays Sys-tem, Plugins and Installed Software information.

Remove Remove the machine from the selected NetVault server.

Check Access Check how good the access is between the selected NetVaultserver and the selected client.

Install LicenceKey

Install a New Licence Key for the selected client. Also choosethis command to install a new licence key for the NetVaultserver in the Server Selection box, which is usually the firstclient in the Clients list box.

Install Software Install new NetVault software components.

RemoveSoftware

Remove any NetVault software components previouslyinstalled using the Install Software command.NOTE: Some installed components (e.g. patches or updates)are deliberately flagged so that they cannot be removed usingthis command.

Icon Indicates:

Page 121: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 109

The following figure shows two examples of the types of searches you can do:

Searching for a Client by Machine Name

1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. nvserver).

2. Click the Find button.

The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search issuccessful, the NetVault Machine (nvserver) is added to the AvailableNetVault Machines list box:

See also Reasons for Search Failures (page 110).

Searching for a Client by IP Address

1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. 192.9.201.238).

2. Click the Find button.

Page 122: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

110 Chapter 5Client Management

The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search issuccessful, the NetVault Machine (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVaultMachines list box:

See also Reasons for Search Failures (page 110).

Reasons for Search FailuresIf the search fails, a dialog box opens and displays the reason for the failure. Someof the possible reasons are:

� The Machine Name that you entered cannot be found in the DNS lookup tableor your machine's host table, or your machine is not able to contact the DNSserver.

� The machine was found, but probably does not have NetVault installed orrunning. In this case, one of the following dialog boxes appears:

Page 123: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 111

� The machine you searched for is already in the list!

Adding a NetVault Client

NetVault is a Network backup solution, using a client/server architecture. A NetVault servercontrols the backup and restore activity for itself and a number of other machines, calledNetVault clients, in a NetVault domain.

A machine being added as a NetVault client requires:

� NetVault client software installed. A NetVault client does not normally have a GUI(Graphical User Interface), although using the Custom install option, one can be addedif necessary. A NetVault server can also be added as a NetVault client in anotherNetVault domain.

� A NetVault Security Password. This is normally added during installation, but can beadded later using the NetVault Configurator run on the local machine. You will need toknow the password to add the client.

Page 124: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

112 Chapter 5Client Management

Adding a NetVault Client

1. Open the NetVault Clients window. Make sure the correct NetVault machine isdisplayed in the Server Selection box.

2. Select the client you want to add from the Available NetVault Machines list.

3. Right-click the client, then choose Add As Client.

SECURITY NOTE: Unless the Security has been disabled in the NetVaultConfigurator, Security tab, you must enter the NetVault Password to begranted access to this client.

NetVault 6Server

Unix / NT

TapeLibrary Network

SCSI

NetVault 6Server

Unix / NT

TapeLibrary

Domain A

Domain B

DomainAdmin

Client Client Client ClientClient

Client Client Client Client Client Client

Client Client

Page 125: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 113

The Password Required dialog box opens:

4. Type the NetVault Password for this machine in the Enter Password box.

5. Click the OK button.

If the password entered was correct and there were no network communicationproblems, the System Access Passed dialog box opens:

NOTE: If the wrong password is entered when adding the client, right-clickthe client in the Clients list and choose Check Access; you can then enterthe correct password. The “System Access Passed” message will appearwhen the security password has been entered correctly.

Page 126: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 127: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 6

Domain ManagementDomain Management - 117

The NetVault Domain Management Window - 117

� Using the Available NetVault Servers List Box - 118� Using the Controlled Servers List Box - 119� Using Find NetVault Machine - 121

Page 128: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 129: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 117

Domain Management

NetVault is a network solution in which one machine is configured as a NetVault server withNetVault clients assigned to it. A single NetVault server and its NetVault clients make up aNetVault Domain.

You can choose to administer the server from the machine running the server software, orfrom a remote workstation. Many servers can be administered from a central location, thuscreating a Domain Management facility. A Domain Manager requires the installation of aNetVault GUI (Graphical User Interface).

In the NetVault Domain Management window you can designate an Available NetVaultServer as a Controlled Server (with the proper security permissions). This sets the serversavailable in the Server Selection list of the general NetVault control windows. Any singleControlled Server can be set as the automatic default for the Server Selection list in all otherwindows.

The NetVault Domain Management Window

The NetVault Domain Management window is similar in layout to the NetVault ClientManagement window.

To open the Domain Management window, shown in the following figure, choose theAdministration Domain Management command:

Options available in the window include:

� Available NetVault Servers: The list of all currently known NetVault servers on thenetwork (local area, wide area or the Internet), along with their current status (blue for

Page 130: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

118 Chapter 6Domain Management

available, red for unavailable). With the correct security password, servers may be addedto the Controlled Servers area.

� Controlled Servers: Displays a list of all NetVault servers which may be controlled fromthe selected server, along with their current status (blue for available, red for unavailable.With the correct security password, servers may be added from the Available NetVaultServers list.

� Find NetVault Machine: Allows a search to be made for a NetVault server machine notcurrently listed in Available NetVault Servers. With this function you can find machineslocated on another network connected by a router, bridge or gateway to the localnetwork.

� File Menu: Provides access to the Close command used to close the window.

� Help Menu: Accesses help for the Current Topic or the Help Contents page.

Using the Available NetVault Servers List BoxThe Available NetVault Servers list box displays a list of all currently knownNetVault servers on the network (local area, wide area or the Internet), along withtheir current status (blue for available, red for unavailable). With the correct securitypassword, servers may be added to the Controlled Servers area.

IconsThe Available NetVault Servers list box indicates the status of NetVault serversusing the following icons:

Icon Indicates:

Available NetVault server. This machine may be added tothe Controlled Servers list.

Unavailable NetVault Server. This is often a machine whichhas NetVault installed on it which is currently switched off, orbooted under a different operating system from the NetVaultinstallation.

(blue)

(red)

Page 131: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 119

Pop-up Menu Commands

NetVault Machine Details Dialog BoxRight-click an Available NetVault Server and choose Show Details to open theNetVault Machine Details dialog box, shown in the following figure:

The following information is included:

� The NetVault name of the machine.

� The Type of the machine (NT or UNIX).

� UDP Fragment Size is the maximum size of a UDP packet.

� Server. TRUE if the machine is a server, FALSE if it is a client.

� Networks. A list of all the network addresses associated with the machine.

� Fixed entry. Not used at this time.

� Preferred Address. The network specified as the primary communication forthat machine.

� Contact Address. The network used by NetVault to communicate with themachine.

� Id. The internal ID number.

� Version. The internal version number.

Using the Controlled Servers List BoxThe Controlled Servers list box displays the list of all NetVault Servers which canbe controlled by the selected server, along with their current status (blue for

Choose thisCommand:

To do this:

Add As Server Add the selected Available NetVault Server to the Con-trolled Servers area.

Show Details Open the NetVault Machine Details dialog box which displaysinformation about the selected Available NetVault Server.

Page 132: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

120 Chapter 6Domain Management

available, red for unavailable). With the correct security password, servers may beadded to the area from the Available NetVault Servers area.

IconsThe Controlled Servers list box displays the status of NetVault servers using thefollowing icons:

Icon Indicates:

Available NetVault Server which has been successfullyadded. The blue icon does not necessarily mean that theNetVault GUI has good access to this server; if you are indoubt as to how efficient the access is, check it by choosingthe Check Access command.

Unavailable NetVault Server. This is often a machine withNetVault installed that is currently switched off, or bootedunder a different operating system from the one containing theNetVault installation.

(blue)

(red)

Page 133: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 121

Pop-up Menu Commands

Using Find NetVault MachineYou can search for a NetVault machine not currently listed in the AvailableNetVault Machines list box using Find NetVault Machine. Normally, all NetVaultmachines on the local network are listed. With Find NetVault Machine, you canfind a NetVault machine on a network connected via a router, bridge, or gateway tothe local network and add it to the list.

The following figure shows two examples of the types of searches you can do:

Searching by Machine Name

1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. nvserver).

2. Click the Find button.

Choose thisCommand:

To do this:

Properties Open the Server Properties dialog box which displays System,Plugins, Installed Software and Capabilities information.

Remove Remove the selected server from the Controlled Servers list.

Make Default Make the selected NetVault server the default for the ServerSelection list shown on most NetVault screens.

Check Access Check how good the access is between the current computerand the selected NetVault server.

Page 134: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

122 Chapter 6Domain Management

The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search issuccessful, the NetVault Server (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVaultServers list box.

Searching by IP Address

1. Enter the name of the machine in the Machine Name box (e.g. 192.9.201.238).

2. Click the Find button.

The hourglass cursor appears while NetVault searches. If the search issuccessful, the NetVault Machine (nvserver) is added to the Available NetVaultMachines list box.

Reasons for Search FailuresIf the search fails, a dialog box opens and displays the reason for the failure. Someof the possible reasons are:

� The Machine Name that you entered cannot be found in the DNS servers list oryour machine's host table.

� The machine was found, but probably does not have NetVault installed orrunning. In this case, one of the following dialog boxes appears:

Page 135: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 123

� The machine you searched for is already in the list!

� The machine has NetVault installed but is not a NetVault server.

Page 136: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 137: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 7

Media ManagementMedia Management - 127

The Media Management Window - 127

� Using the Media List Box - 128� Status Information in Details Area - 129� Using the Backup Saveset Pop-up Menu - 135� Backup Saveset Information in Details Area - 135

Page 138: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 139: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 127

Media Management

Managing the media you use to store your data is effortless with NetVault’s MediaManagement utility. In the Media Management window you have access to all theinformation you need about your media.

To open the Media Management window, shown in the following figure, click the MediaManagement button on the command toolbars or choose Operations Media management:

The Media Management Window

The NetVault Media Management window allows media to be examined for the selectedserver. The window contains a Media selection area and Details tabbed areas to allowdifferent aspects of either the Media or backup saveset to be examined.

The Media Management window contains the following options:

� Media: This area is used to select either the Media (e.g. tape or virtual tape) or thebackup saveset to be examined or controlled.

� Details: This tabbed area provides status information on either the media or savesetselected.

� File Menu: Accesses commands to Print Setup, Print and Close the window.

� Help Menu: Accesses the commands used to display help for the Current Topic or theHelp Contents page.

Page 140: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

128 Chapter 7Media Management

Using the Media List BoxThe Media list box of the window contains the following options:

Icons

Pop-up Menu Commands

Icon Indicates:

Media Group (with Group Label Name alongside) - This icon isonly shown if a Group Label was defined when the media was firstlabelled (an advanced function). All media with this Group Label willbe shown in an indented list directly beneath it.

Tape Media (with Media Label Name alongside) - This icon repre-sents Tape Media. If the media has been automatically labelled byNetVault, or manually labelled without a Group Label, the icon isshown on the left; otherwise it will be indented under the MediaGroup icon (as shown at the bottom).

Virtual Tape Media (with Media Label Name alongside) - This iconrepresents Virtual Tape Media (actually a disk file). If the media hasbeen automatically labelled by NetVault, or manually labelled withouta Group Label, the icon is shown on the left; otherwise it will beindented under the Media Group icon (as shown at the bottom).

Backup Saveset (with Job Title and Saveset Number alongside)- This icon represents a Saveset for a job written to the media. Notethat a Saveset may span more than one media item, in which case itwill be listed under each.

Choose thisCommand:

To do this:

Open Open the media to display any Savesets.

Status Displays a tabbed set of information in the Details area. Theactual tabs displayed can vary, but may include Details, Statis-tics, History Library and Media Requests.

Remove Remove the media selected from the NetVault Database afterconfirmation. Only offline media may be removed. If youdecide to use it again to restore data from it, you will need toScan it using the Device Management facilities to re-add thedetails to the database.

Re-use Mark the media for re-use. Until the first new backup saveset iswritten to the media, the existing data may still be recovered byre-scanning the media (as above).

Page 141: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 129

Status Information in Details AreaWhen an item of Media is selected and the pop-up menu opened, as shown in thefollowing figure, you can choose Status to display information in the Details area.

The actual tabs appearing in the Details section can vary, but can include tabs forDetails, Statistics, History and Library and Media Requests.

Details TabThe Details tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Properties Displays the Properties of the media which include: MediaLabel, Group Label, Offsite Location and Tape Format. Exceptfor blank media, only the Offsite Location may be changedhere.

Choose thisCommand:

To do this:

Page 142: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

130 Chapter 7Media Management

Typical information shown on the Details tab includes:

Statistics TabThe Statistics tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Statistics tab includes:

Name Description

Name The title given to a specific piece of media.

Group Name The name assigned to several pieces of media.

OffsiteLocation

The location of the media. Used to identify a media’s originwhen the media is imported to a new location.

Space Used Graphically indicates how much space on the media has beenused. If you require a quantity in Mbytes, please see SpaceUsed in the Statistics tab.

Media Type Details the type of media used, tape, disk file, etc.

Barcode If the media has a barcode, it is displayed here.

Retire Media Indicates whether the device media should be discarded aftera specified number of backups or period of time.

Name Description

Space Left Indicates how much space is left on the media. This informa-tion is important when considering where backed up datashould be placed.

Data Stored Shows how much data has been stored on the media.

Number ofSegments

Details the number of media segments contained on an item ofmedia.

Page 143: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 131

History TabThe History Tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the History tab includes:

Date LastWritten

Shows when the media was last written on. The first four digitssignify the year, the next two the month and the last two theday. The time is displayed in a 24 hour clock format.

Date Last Read Shows when the media was last read. The date protocol is thesame as Date Last Written.

Name Description

Times Reused Indicates how many times the media has been used.

Read Errors Lists the number of Read Errors that have occurred. Normallyyou would see no errors. If there are errors it could indicatepossible media or drive failures, and the cause should beinvestigated immediately.

Write Errors Lists the number of errors that have occurred writing data tothe media. If there are errors it could indicate possible mediaor drive failures, and the cause should be investigated immedi-ately.

Total DataWritten

Indicates the amount of data written to the Media. This is arunning total which spans any Reuse of the tape.

Total DataRead

Indicates the amount of data read from the Media. This is arunning total which spans any Reuse of the tape.

Name Description

Page 144: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

132 Chapter 7Media Management

Library Info TabThe Library Info tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Library Info tab includes:

Media Request TabThe Media Request tab is an administrative tool displaying information on NetVaultmedia requests while a job is active. This information is useful when determining whya backup job using the media is paused and displays 'Waiting for Media' in the JobStatus window.

Name Description

Name The name allocated to the Library in the NetVault Device Man-agement window.

In Shows the Drive where the media is located.

Home Shows the Slot where media is located.

Page 145: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 133

The Media Request Tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Media Request tab includes:

Name Description

Request The identifying number for the media request.

Job The related Job Number.

Request type Indicates whether the media request is for a backup or arestore.NOTE: The other parameters listed here are for a backupmedia request.

Status The current status of the job.

RequestingMachine

The NetVault machine requesting the media.

Drives Indicates which drive(s) the media request uses. In this exam-ple, the Backup was targeted to a single drive, the virtuallibrary G:, DRIVE 1, so only this drive is listed.

Page 146: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

134 Chapter 7Media Management

Media Specifies which media the request uses. In this example, theBackup did not use target specific media, so 'Any' is shown. Ifthe Backup uses target specific media, e.g. by Media Label(MID) or Media Group, then the appropriate identifier is shown.

Requiredamount ofmedia

Indicates the setting of the Specify minimum space required onmedia before backup option in the Backup - Target, GeneralOption tab. In this example, only media with at least 18 Mbytesfree may be used.

Force firstbackup

Indicates the setting of the Force first backup option. ensurethis backup is the first on the media option in the Backup - Tar-get, General Option tab.

Labelautomatically

Indicates the setting of the Automatically label new or reusedmedia option in the Backup - Target, Media Option tab.

Mark mediaread-only oncompletion

Indicates the setting of the Protect media from further writesafter backup option in the Backup - Target, General Optiontab.

Use mediaformat

Normally this parameter will be set to default. This means thatthe default media format will be used (MTF for NT, or CPIO forUNIX). When a backup needs to span more than one item ofmedia, if the first item of media uses MTF, then all other othersmust also use MTF (similar for CPIO, i.e. a backup job cannotused mixed media formats).

Return mediato slot oncompletion

This parameter applies only to media in Libraries. When theLibrary Return inactive media to slot delay parameter is set inthe Add Library - Configure, Library Icon pop-up menu, Config-ure command, the specified parameter is listed here.

Name Description

Page 147: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 135

Using the Backup Saveset Pop-up MenuWhen a backup saveset is selected, and the pop-up menu opened, the Statuscommand is available:

Backup Saveset Information in Details AreaWhen the Status command is chosen for a selected backup saveset, informationabout the Saveset is displayed in the Details tabbed area. If a backup spans morethat one item of media, the same Saveset number will be listed under all mediaused.

The tabs that appear in the Details area can vary, but will always include a singleBackup tab and at least one Segment tab. The Backup tab provides backupoverview information and the Segment 1 tab contains data about the first backupsegment. The Segment 2 tab appears only when the media is written using MTF(Microsoft Tape Format); the Segment 2 tab is a fixed 32 Kilobyte closing datasection for MTF compliance.

Statuscommand

Page 148: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

136 Chapter 7Media Management

The Backup TabThe Backup tab appears is shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Backup tab includes:

Name Description

Job This is the job number the request relates to.

Title The name or title given to the backup job.

Server The NetVault Server in control of the relevant backup.

Client The NetVault Client for whom data had been backed up.

Plugin Details the type of plugin used to carry out the backup.

Backup Set The Backup Set allows a particular backup to be saved and re-loaded for use with more than one Backup Submission. Thisarea will tell you the name of the Backup Set used, if any (e.g.Rich,e:\_test).

Date The date and time when the backup occurred.

Incremental Indicates if the backup is an Incremental type backup or a Fullbackup.

Archive Indicates if the backup has been marked as an archive

Generations If the backup is to be discarded after a specified number of fullbackups, the Generations detail shows the remaining numberof backups available. For instance, if n (the number of fullbackups) has a value of 5, the generations counter is reducedby 1 each time there is a full backup. Once the generationsreach 0, the backup is retired. Backup Life is set in theNetVault Backup, Advanced Options tabbed area. For moreinformation about using Advanced Options, see Using theAdvanced Options Tab (page 273).

Page 149: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 137

Segment 1 TabThe Segment 1 tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Segment 1 tab includes:

Retire The date the backup will be retired, or NEVER.

Name Description

Length The length of the segment in Mbytes.

Offset The number of bytes the start of this segment is offset from thestart of the backup. The first segment is always offset 0 bytes.

Position Position of the segment on the NetVault media.

Block Size The block size being used by the device. Backups are saved tothe media in whole multiples of this block size, with the lastblock being padded out when required.

Total Time Total time taken for the backup. In this example, using a virtual(disk) tape, the time taken was so short that it is shown as 0secs.

Transfer Time The amount of time taken for the backup job to transfer to thesegment. In this example, using a virtual (disk) tape, the timetaken was so short that it is shown as 0 secs.

Retire The date the backup will be retired, or NEVER.

Length The length of the segment in Mbytes.

Name Description

Page 150: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

138 Chapter 7Media Management

Segment 2 TabThe Segment 2 tab, with information on a fixed 32 Kilobyte tape index section forMTF compliance, appears as shown in the following figure:

Typical information shown on the Segment 2 tab includes:

Name Description

Length The length of the segment in Mbytes.

Offset The number of bytes the start of this segment is offset from thestart of the backup. In this example, as the first segment was1.81 Mbytes long, the start of the second segment is offset bythat amount.

Position Position of the segment on the NetVault media.

Block Size The block size being used by the device. Backups are saved tothe media in whole multiples of this block size (the last blockbeing padded out when required).

Total Time Total time taken for the backup. In this example, using a virtual(disk) tape, the time taken was so short that it is shown as 0secs.

Transfer Time The amount of time taken for the backup job to transfer to thesegment. In this example, using a virtual (disk) tape, the timetaken was so short that it is shown as 0 secs.

Retire Is a date the backup will be retired, or NEVER.

Length The length of the segment in Mbytes.

Page 151: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 8

NetVault Server StatusThe NetVault Server Status Window - 141

� Using the Device Status Area - 142� Using the Client Status Area - 143� Using the Client Status Area - 143� Using Operator Status Area - 146

Page 152: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 153: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 141

The NetVault Server Status Window

The NetVault Server Status window displays information on the status of the selectedserver. The window contains individual, re-sizable areas for the display of each type ofinformation. Each of the areas is explained in the sections of this chapter.

The NetVault Server Status window appears as shown in the following figure:

The window contains the following information:

� Device Status: Shows the availability and state of each device for the NetVault server.

� Client Status: Shows the state of each NetVault client of the NetVault server.

� Job Status: Shows the state of each job controlled by the NetVault server.

� Operator Messages: Shows all Operator Messages for jobs controlled by the NetVaultserver.

� File Menu: Accesses the commands used to Print Setup, Print and Close thewindow.

Page 154: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

142 Chapter 8NetVault Server Status

� Operations Menu: Contains commands to open other windows:

� Backup

� Restore

� Media Management

� Job Management

� Logs

� Administration Menu: Contains commands to open other windows:

� Client Management

� Domain Management

� Device Management

� Policy Management

� Help Menu: Accesses the commands used to display help for the Current Topic or theHelp Contents page.

Using the Device Status AreaThe Device Status area shows the availability and state of each device for theselected NetVault server.

Drive LightsDrives are shown with one of three colored lights:

Drive Light Indicates:

A drive with a Green light, indicates that the drive is availableand not in use.

A drive with a Yellow light, indicates that the drive is currentlyin use.

A drive with a Red light, indicates that the drive is not available(and there could be a problem with it).

Green

Yellow

Red

Page 155: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 143

Using the Client Status AreaThe Client Status area shows the state of each NetVault Client of the selectedNetVault server.

IconsThe Client Status area shows NetVault clients using the following icons:

Using the Job Status AreaThe Job Status area shows the state of each job for the selected NetVault server.Jobs listed are all those submitted since the NetVault services were last started.

Icon Indicates:

Available NetVault Client with NetVault password protection.This is normally a temporary state while the client is beingadded; once the client has been successfully added, the key isremoved. It can also occur if the NetVault Password has beenchanged for the client since it was added.

Available NetVault Client which has been successfullyadded. The blue icon does not necessarily mean that theNetVault Server has good access to this client; if you are indoubt as to how efficient the access is, right-click the clientthen choose Check Access.

Unavailable NetVault Client. This is often a machine withNetVault installed that is currently switched off, or bootedunder a different operating system from the one containing theNetVault installation.

(blue)

(blue)

(red)

Page 156: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

144 Chapter 8NetVault Server Status

Job Status IdentificationJobs are displayed in different colors, depending on their status:

Pop-up Menu CommandsA pop-up menu opens when you right-click a selected item. The commands availablein the menu vary, depending on the current job status. The Status tab contains thesame information as displayed in the Status area of the NetVault Server Statuswindow; the descriptions below relate to both areas.

Scheduled Job Area Pop-up Menus

The Scheduled Job area (default color Cyan Blue) pop-up menu commands are:

Icon Indicates:

Cyan Blue Jobs Scheduled, but not yet running.

Yellow Jobs currently Running.

White Jobs Completed (not necessarily successfully).

Dark Blue Selected Job (right mouse button for options).

Choose thiscommand:

To do this:

Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window.This allows all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied toa new job. You may also double-click the log entry to performthe same function.

Delete Schedule Delete the job schedule. Note that the job itself is not deletedand continues to appear in the Jobs area. If necessary youcan load the job into the appropriate backup or restore windowand re-submit it later.

Hold Put a temporary hold on the scheduled job. After selection,this menu item changes to Resume which may be selected tore-activate the job as scheduled.

Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job tothe job queue to run it as soon as possible.

Page 157: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 145

Running Job Area Pop-up Menus

The Running Job area (default color Yellow) pop-up menu commands are:

Completed Job Area Pop-up Menus

The Completed job area (default color White) pop-up menu commands are:

Choose thiscommand:

To do this:

Monitor Job Open the Job Monitor dialog box for the selected job. This pro-vides both Job Information and Data Transfer information asthe job progresses. You may also double-click the log entry toperform the same function.

View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all logentries).

Abort Job Abort a running job. After selection, an Aborting Job dialogbox opens. The job Status is shown as Aborted by user.

Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore windowto allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to anew job.

Choose thiscommand:

To do this:

View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all logentries).

Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore windowto allow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to anew job.

Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job tothe job queue to run it as soon as possible.

Page 158: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

146 Chapter 8NetVault Server Status

Using Operator Status AreaThe Operator Messages area shows all Operator Messages for the selectedNetVault server.

Most of these messages are various types of Warnings that require some operatorintervention. For example, the above message indicates No suitable media foundfor Job 15. This may require the tape(s) to be changed in one or more devicescontrolled by the selected NetVault server.

Page 159: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 9

Disaster RecoveryDisaster Recovery - 149

Backing Up the NetVault Database - 149

NetVault Database Recovery - 149

� Restoring Basic Operating System - 149� Restoring NetVault Operation - 150� Handling Backups Since Last NV Database Backup - 150

Restoring the NetVault Database - 150

Importing Media Unknown to NV Database - 151

Using the Data Copy Plugin - 151

� Target Audience - 152� Installing the Data Copy Plugin - 152� Backing Up Data with the Data Copy Plugin - 152� Copying Data - 152� Copying a Backup - 155� Copying a Backup Set - 156

Page 160: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 161: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 149

Disaster Recovery

Backing up and storing your data is crucial to recovering from a catastrophic event thatdestroys your data. There are two important components to easily restoring information:

� The NetVault Database

� Copying backed up data to an offsite location using the Data Copy plugin included inyour NetVault installation.

This chapter discusses how to use each of these features to ensure that you can access andrecover data.

The NetVault Database

The NetVault database contains all details for the installation of the NetVault server. Thisincludes information on configuration, keys, log, media and schedules.

Because this information is important to keeping NetVault operations available, a backup ofthe NetVault database should be scheduled to run daily, preferably as the last job in thedaily backup process. With a good NetVault database backup you can quickly restoreNetVault to full operation, if necessary.

Backing Up the NetVault Database

The NetVault database can be backed up at any time as long as no other jobs are running.

To perform the backup, follow the steps found in Chapter 10, Backing Up Data (page 157). Itis recommended that you use Target Media to direct the output of the backup to a specificitem of media (MID or Media Identifier); if recovery becomes necessary the media can beeasily and quickly found and restored.

NetVault Database Recovery

In the case of a critical event, typically a hard disk crash, the NetVault server and possiblythe computer it is installed on, may become unusable.

Depending on the configuration of the computer, you may need to perform some, or all, ofthe following steps:

Restoring Basic Operating System1. Replace the defective hard drive.

NOTE: It is strongly recommended that a NetVault database backup bescheduled to run on a daily basis and as the last job run in the daily backupschedule.

Page 162: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

150 Chapter 9Disaster Recovery

2. Re-install the operating system if it was stored on the defective drive.

Restoring NetVault Operation1. Re-install NetVault on the new hard disk, using the same path as the original

installation.

Do not add any NetVault clients, unless your main NetVault device is notconnected to your NetVault server. If it is connected, then add the machine it isconnected to as a NetVault client.

2. Remove all media from your normal NetVault device, except the item of mediacontaining the most recent NetVault database backup.

3. Add the NetVault device as normal. See Adding NetVault Devices (page 77) formore information.

4. Restore the database backup using the steps in Chapter 11, Restoring Data(page 197).

The installation should now be restored to the state it was in at the time the lastdatabase backup was performed. Restore any other data that was lost using thenormal NetVault backup media.

Handling Backups Since Last NV Database BackupIf any backups were performed since the last NetVault database backup, the mediacontaining the backups should be scanned to add the backups to the NetVaultdatabase and enable these items of media to be used for further backups.

To scan for backups, select the slot or drive containing the media from the Devicestab of the Device Management or Restore windows, and choose Scan from the pop-up menu.

Restoring the NetVault Database

Restoring the NetVault database is normally performed as part of disaster recovery, and isusually a full database restore. It is possible to restore part of the NetVault database backup,but it is recommended that you do so only under the guidance of NetVault Technical Support(page 6).

To restore the NetVault database, in its entirety, follow these steps:

1. Open the Device Management window by clicking the Device Managementbutton on the command toolbars, or by choosing the Administration DeviceManagement command.

2. Make sure that the media containing the most recent NetVault database backupis in a drive or library slot. The media is display as FOREIGN, since it is currentlyunknown to the new NetVault database installation.

Page 163: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 151

3. Select the drive or library slot, right-click and choose Scan from the pop-upmenu.

The media is scanned and details of the backups contained on it are added tothe current NetVault database. The word FOREIGN is removed and the drivelight should turn green.

4. Close the Device Management window.

5. Open the Restore window by clicking the Restore button on the commandtoolbars, or by choosing Operations Restore.

6. Select the client (or NetVault server) and choose Open from the pop-up menu,or double-click the client to display the databases within it.

7. Open the NetVault Databases item to display the backup savesets available forrestore.

8. Select the most recent backup saveset, right-click and choose Open from thepop-up menu, or double-click the backup saveset.

9. Select all items in the backup saveset by clicking the square next to each item.

10. Enter the name of the job in the Job Title box.

11. Submit the job by clicking the Submit button.

The NetVault database restore will be run. Do not monitor the job while it is running, sincethis may interfere with the process. It is best to submit the job and then close all NetVaultwindows until the restore is complete.

Importing Media Unknown to NV Database

To import NetVault media from a different NetVault server (or a previous installation of thecurrent NetVault server), use the Scan utility found in the pop-up menu that appears whenyou select the media in the drive or library slot in the Device Management screen.

For more information on using the Scan utility, see Scanning Drives and Media (page 94).

Using the Data Copy Plugin

The Data Copy plugin allows you to make copies of a previously completed backup andschedule copies to be made on a regular basis. Copies can be made of any one of theexisting backup savesets or from a backup set.

Page 164: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

152 Chapter 9Disaster Recovery

Target AudienceNo special skills are required for routine backup operations or for using the DataCopy plugin.

Installing the Data Copy PluginThe Data Copy plugin is included and automatically installed when you installNetVault and no further installation activity is required. The Data Copy plugin is onlyavailable for a NetVault server.

Backing Up Data with the Data Copy PluginBackups are performed using the standard steps for any backup job. For completeinformation on backing up data, see your NetVault Administrator’s Guide.

Even though the Data Copy plugin is installed, it is not used during normal backupfunctions.

Copying DataThe Data Copy plugin copies previously made backups. You can make copies in twoways:

� From the Backups folder. You can select a single backup saveset from theBackups folder and create a copy.

� From the Backup Sets folder: When you select a Backup Set to copy,NetVault always copies the most current data, unless the “use last full backup”option is selected.

To perform a copy of a backup using the Data Copy plugin, follow these steps:

1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on thecommand toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. TheNetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.

2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu ordouble-click the client to display the list of installed plugins. You must select theserver with the Data Copy plugin installed. Servers are always listed at the top ofthe data tree

Page 165: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 153

3. Double-click the Data Copy plugin to open and display the folders:

NOTE: It is important to note that two devices, or pieces of media, are requiredto copy data.

Page 166: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

154 Chapter 9Disaster Recovery

4. Double-click the Backups or Backup Sets folder to display the list of clients onthe server with backups or backup sets available to be copied.

5. Double-click the desired client and continue to double-click to open each itemuntil you reach the backups available to be copied. For instructions on copying abackup saveset, see Copying a Backup (page 155). Information on copying abackup set can be found in Copying a Backup Set (page 156).

6. Click the Backup Options tab to display the backup options, shown in thefollowing figure:

7. Select the desired Data Copy Options as follows:

� COPY TYPE - Copy a full backup to produce a new independent copy ofthe data: Copies the selected backup; producing a new image with its ownindex.

� COPY TYPE - Duplicate a backup (duplicated incrementals will need theiroriginal full backup for restore): Duplicates the data. Both copies share theexisting index. A new index is not created.

� COPY TYPE - Use Saveset name from original backup: Loads and uses theSelection saveset from the original backup for the current data copy. Thisoption is available for selection when the Copy a full backup to produce anew independent copy of the data option is selected. When the Duplicate abackup (duplicated incrementals will need their original full backup forrestore) option is selected, this option is automatically activated.

� COPY TYPE - Automatically get a set’s last full backup: When selected,this option directs NetVault to retrieve the last full backup performed with theselected set.

Page 167: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 155

� COPY TYPE - Use a set’s most recent job regardless of type: Repeats thelast backup performed on the set, whether it was an incremental or fullbackup.

� Migrate (Discard original backup): Makes a copy of the original backup thenremoves the original. This option is useful for disk staging and tape cleanups.

� BACKUP LIFE - Use originals life: Applies the same backup life to the copyas was used for the original backup.

� BACKUP LIFE - Use ‘Backup Life’ on “Advanced Options’ tab: Resets thebackup life for the copy to the selection made in the Advanced Options tab.

8. Enter a title for the job in the Job Title box.

9. Submit the backup job by clicking the Submit button on the command toolbar.

See your NetVault Administrator’s Guide for information on viewing the jobstatus, progress and log.

Copying a BackupThe Backup folder lists the clients and all backups done on each, similar to theexample shown in the following figure:

1. Select the desired backup saveset.

2. Select any other desired options and submit the job.

Page 168: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

156 Chapter 9Disaster Recovery

Copying a Backup SetThe Backup Sets folder lists the Backup Sets used to create backups, similar to thatshown in the following figure:

1. Select the desired backup set.

2. Select any other options and submit the job

NetVault locates the most current backup with this data in it and performs the copy.

Page 169: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 10

Backing Up DataBacking up Your Data - 159

The NetVault Backup Window - 159

� Backup Window Buttons - 160� Window Tabs - 160� Menu Commands - 161� Using the Selections Tab - 162� Using the Backup Options Tab - 168� Using the Schedule Tab - 173� Using the Target Tab - 174� Advanced Options - 178� Savesets - 178

Incremental Backup Procedure - 179

� Creating a Typical Weekly Full and Incremental Schedule - 179

Restoring Incremental Backups - 180

Doing a Simple Backup - 180

Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin - 182

� Installing the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin - 182� How the Plugin Works - 182� Consolidating Backups - 182

Using the Raw Device Plugin - 186

� Installing the Raw Device Plugin - 186� Using the Raw Device Plugin for NT - 187� Using the Raw Device Plugin for UNIX - 192

Page 170: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 171: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 159

Backing up Your Data

A NetVault backup is the name given to the transfer of data from the NetVault client to thebackup device. The device's media stores the data, where it can be recovered by NetVault ifneeded. Note that the NetVault server itself also acts as a NetVault client so that it maybackup its own data.

Most backups are very easy to create and submit. The NetVault Backup window providesaccess to a number of control functions, some of which are required only under specialcircumstances.

Data can be backed up in a variety of ways, including:

� A NetVault server can back up its data to itself as a NetVault client.

� Data can be backed up to devices across a network.

� Backed up data can be placed on more than one type of media.

� Backups can be scheduled to run automatically.

� Data can be backed up completely or incrementally.

In this chapter you will learn how to perform a simple backup and what the advanced optionsare for more complex backup jobs.

The NetVault Backup Window

The NetVault Backup window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting backupjobs for any NetVault client controlled by the selected NetVault server.

The NetVault Backup window appears as shown in the following figure:

Page 172: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

160 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

The NetVault Backup window contains the following options:

Backup Window ButtonsThere are four buttons at the top of the NetVault Backup window that perform thefollowing functions:

Window TabsThe following tabs appear on the window:

� Selections: Used to select the data to be backed up, using the appropriateNetVault plugin. Some NetVault plugins are provided as part of the standardinstallation, while Application Plugin Modules (APM) are only available ifinstalled separately. For more information on installing plugins, see InstallingNetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).

� Backup Options: The Backup Options tab allows extra information for the jobto be specified, depending on the NetVault plugin or APM in use in theSelections area. For example, a File System backup (e.g. NT or UNIX FileSystem plugin) allows you to specify the type of backup (e.g. Full, Incremental,etc.). For NetVault APM’s, the settings available may include login details (e.g.Connect As, Password) to allow access to the data selected for backup. For a

Click thisbutton

To do this:

Clear current NetVault backup selections and control settingsand create a new backup job. Remember that you can createand save a backup job without submitting it.

Load an existing backup job, so this it may be modified, cop-ied, re-saved under the current or a new job number and sub-mitted. It is often easier to re-load a backup job by first findingit in the list in the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab list, selectingit and then choosing Edit/Modify.

Save the current backup Job. Remember that you can accessthe saved job via the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab (seeUsing the Job Status Area (page 143)), as well as clicking theLoad button to reload it. It is very important for good backupmanagement that you save a backup job with a meaningfulname as a Job Title.

Add the job to the scheduled jobs list (except for triggered jobswhich are just saved). Scheduled jobs are listed on the Statustab of the NetVault Jobs window (see Using The Status Tab(page 242)) and the Job Status area of the NetVault ServerStatus window (see Using The Status Tab (page 242)).

NEW

LOAD

SAVE

SUBMIT

Page 173: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 161

description of the more standard options, see Using the Backup Options Tab(page 168).

� Schedule: Used to specify when the job will run. Jobs can be scheduled torun immediately, at a later date/time or run when triggered by a command lineor script command. You can also set a job to run once or to repeat. For fullinformation on both backup and restore job scheduling, see SchedulingBackup & Restore Jobs (page 225).

� Target: Used to specify what the selected data is backed up on (or to). Youmay Target a particular Device or Media, and set parameters for GeneralOptions. See Using the Target Tab (page 174) for more information.

� Advanced Options: The options in the Advanced Options tab are only usedfor advanced functions, including setting Backup Life, Compression,Verification, Duplication, Pre and Post Scripts. The use of these functions isdetailed in Using Advanced Features (page 271).

Menu CommandsThe Menu Bar in the NetVault Backup window provides access to the commandsdescribed in the following table:

MenuChoose thiscommand:

To do this:

File New Creates a new backup job.

Load Opens the Load Backup Job dialogbox where you can select a saved jobthat you want to run again.

Save Saves the current backup job andassigns a job name.

Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box whereyou can select the desired printer andspecify its properties.

Close Close the Backup window.

View Selections Open the Selections tab.

Backup Options Open the Backup Options tab.

Schedule Open the Schedule tab.

Target Open the Target tab.

Advanced Options Open the Advanced Options tab.

Accept Submit Backup Starts the backup job.

Page 174: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

162 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

Using the Selections TabThe Selections tab is used to select the data to be backed up, using the appropriateNetVault plugin or APM. Some NetVault plugins are provided as part of the standardinstallation, while APM’s are only available if installed separately. For moreinformation on NetVault plugins see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).

The Selections tab of the NetVault Backup window appears as shown in thefollowing figure:

Selecting Data to be Backed UpThe exact method used to select the data to be backed up depends on the type ofNetVault plugin being used. Refer to Using Help (page 5) to get more information onthe online Plugin Help installed with the plugin. Some standard methods are detailedhere.

Help Current Topic Display a description of and help forthe current focus item.

Help Contents Display the Help Contents.

MenuChoose thiscommand:

To do this:

Page 175: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 163

Windows File System Plugin Data Selection ExampleThe following example demonstrates how to select data for backup using aWindows NT File System Plugin.

1. Select the Client, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the client).

2. Select the Plugin, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the plugin).

The About menu command displays information on the NetVault PluginVersion, and if applicable, the Licence details. The File Systems Help menuitem opens the Help screen for the plugin loaded.

The plugin opens to display all drives for the selected client.

The following is an example of typical drives which may be displayed whenusing the NT File Systems plugin. Note you cannot select the Shared Drives forbackup with this plugin.

Page 176: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

164 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

3. Select the desired Drive, right-click and choose Open or double-click the drive,as shown in the following figure:

When you want the drive to be included in the backup, click the square to its leftto place a green check mark there. Information about the drive can be displayedby right-clicking and choosing the View Details command from the pop-upmenu.

Page 177: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 165

4. Select the Directory, right-click and choose Open or double-click it.

When you want the directory to be included in the backup, click the square to itsleft to place a green check mark there. Information about the directory can bedisplayed by choosing the View Details command.

Page 178: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

166 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

The restore tree for this example saveset has been expanded. Continue to openeach level of the tree until the files you want to backup are displayed. You canselect a file to be restored by clicking the square to its left, so that the greencheck mark is displayed. You can also View Details of the file.

5. Select the data to be backed up by clicking the square to the left of each desireditem. In the following example, the complete drive is selected for backup:

If you do not want to include a file (or directory tree) in the selection, click thesquare to its left again. The green check mark changes to a red X, indicating thatit is excluded from the backup:

Page 179: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 167

Once the data has been selected, you should do the following:

1. Set the required Backup Options. See Using the Backup Options Tab (page168).

2. Enter a name for the job in the Job Title box.

3. Either click the Save button to save the backup, or the Submit button to startthe backup job.

A job can be created and submitted this way very quickly, and because no Schedule(or other) options have been set, the backup should run immediately using whatevermedia (not in a Media Group) is available.

Windows 2000 Selection OptionsThe File System plugin for Windows 2000 operating systems allows you to choosethe System Settings directory, or any part of it, for backup. An expanded SystemSettings directory is shown in the following figure:

The icons and files located in the System Settings directory appear only when thatparticular service is running and can include all or a portion of the following:

� Registry

Page 180: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

168 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

� Active Directory

� Cluster Database

� Certificate Server

� COM + class registration database

� Remote Storage Manager

� Remote Storage Manager Database

� IIS Metabase

� Disk Quota Database

Using the Backup Options TabWhen available for the type of NetVault plugin being used in the Selections tab, theBackup Options tab allows extra information for the job to be specified.

The Backup Options tab for Windows NT is shown in the following example:

Page 181: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 169

The Backup Options tab for Windows 2000 is shown in the following example:

General Backup OptionsThe information available in the Backup Options tab is dependent on the type ofplugin in use in the Selections area. This includes:

� For a Windows NT or 2000 File System or UNIX File System plugin, thesettings available include the type of backup (e.g. Full, Incremental, etc.) andwhether you want to check for files being modified during backup.

� For some plugins, the settings available may include login details (e.g.Connect As, Password) to allow access to the data selected for backup.

� For other plugins, there may be no backup options at all (e.g NetVaultDatabases plugins)

The online Help System provides for specific Backup Options information for eachNetVault plugin. See Using Help (page 5) for instructions on accessing the help files.

Backup TypeWhen present, the Backup Type frame normally has two options:

� Full: When the selected Backup Type is Full, NetVault will perform acomplete backup of all data selected. The only exceptions are certain types ofdata (often specific system files) which can never be backed up and will

Page 182: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

170 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

produce warning messages in the Job Log if NetVault attempts to back themup.

The Full backup type is always the default backup method, used when thereare no Backup Options displayed or they have not been explicitly set

� Incremental: When the selected Backup Type is Incremental, NetVault willbackup only data that has altered since a previous backup was completed.

There are two types of Incremental backup:

Changed since last backup - This Incremental backup type will only backupdata that has changed since the last backup, regardless of the type of backuppreviously executed.

Changed since last FULL backup - This Incremental backup type will backupall data that has changed since the last Full backup. This may include data thathas already been backed up by the Incremental backup type - Changedsince last backup.

NetVault uses an innovative method of displaying Incremental backups in theNetVault Restore window, allowing ALL data in the selection to restored in a singleRestore Job (regardless of what saveset actually contains the data). See RestoringIncremental Backups (page 218).

Miscellaneous SwitchesNetVault checks for files modified during a backup by reading the date and size ofthe file being backed up before and after the backup is performed. By default, filesmodified during the backup are not restored unless the Check for files beingmodified during backup option is turned on. The backed up file is placed in thebackup index and is fully restorable. A modified file is displayed with a broken filefolder icon in the restore window.

The Windows 2000 plugin includes the option to Backup through Mount Points,which is a drive attached to an empty folder on an NTFS volume. Mounted drivesfunction the same as any other drive, but are assigned a label or name instead of adrive letter. The mounted drive’s name is resolved to a full file system path instead ofjust a drive letter. If this option is cleared, only the mount information is backed up,not the data on the mounted drive.

WARNING: In order to perform an Incremental Backup, you MUST use aSelection Set set up for a job using the Full backup type. Please refer toIncremental Backup Procedure (page 179) for more information.

NOTE: If you have backed up data through a mount point, and then performa restore, NetVault restores the data to its original location.

Page 183: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 171

Windows NT Filesystem Backup OptionsThe NT Filesystem plugin uses Full and Incremental options, see Backup Type(page 169).

The Ignore archive bit switch is available when Incremental Backup Type isselected. When selected, this switch causes incremental data to be backed up,regardless of the state of the archive bit.

Windows 2000 Filesystem Backup OptionsThe 2000 Filesystem plugin uses Full and Incremental options, see Backup Type(page 169).

There is an additional area, Miscellaneous Switches, which include:

� Backup through Mount Points: When selected, the data that is on amounted drive is backed up. If this option is cleared and you back up amounted drive, only the path information for the mounted drive is backed up.

Page 184: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

172 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

The Account Details area requires the following information when backing upencrypted files:

� Username: The username of the Administrators group. This must be anaccount in the group which has the “run as service” privilege.

� Password: The password for the Administrators username.

Some important information about the Windows 2000 File System plugin:

� Hard Links: When the first occurrence of a hard link is found, the data isbacked up. For all other occurrences, only the link is backed up. This data canonly be restored when the first occurrence exists; trying to restore subsequentoccurrences without the presence of the first causes the job to fail.

� Sparse files: A sparse file is a very large file created by application in such away that only limited disk space is needed (i.e. NTFS allocates disk space onlyto the portions of a file that are written to). A backed up sparse file is restoredsparse rather than taking up the physical disk space for its size.

� NTFS-5 volume: A NetVault backup can be used to backup and restore NTFSvolumes. If you have backed up data from an NTFS volume used in Windows2000, it is recommended that you restore the data to an NTFS volume used inWindows 2000 to avoid losing data and some file and folder features. Forexample, permissions, encrypting file system (EFS) settings, disk quotainformation, mounted drive information, and Remote Storage information canbe lost if you back up data from an NTFS volume used in Windows 2000 andthen restore it to an NTFS or FAT volume used in Windows NT 4.0.

Unix Filesystem Backup OptionsThe UNIX Filesystem plugin uses Full and Incremental options, see Backup Type(page 169).

Page 185: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 173

There is an additional area, Miscellaneous Switches, which can be dynamicallyaltered as necessary. A typical option provided here is:

Backup through NFS mounts? - When selected, this switch causes any NFSmounts in the backup selection to be included in the backup. By default, this switchis cleared, as normally the mounted system would be backed up via a NetVaultClient on that machine.

Using the Schedule TabThe Schedule tab is used to set when the job is to run. Jobs can be scheduled to runimmediately, at a later date/time or when triggered by a command line or scriptcommand. Options are also provided for setting a job to run once or to repeat. Forfull information for both backup and restore job scheduling, see Scheduling Backup& Restore Jobs (page 225).

The NetVault Backup window, Schedule tab, is shown in the following figure:

Page 186: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

174 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

Using the Target TabThe Target tab is used to set what the selected data is backed up on (or to). You maytarget a particular Device or Media, and set parameters for General Options.

The NetVault Backup window, Target tab, is shown in the following figure:

The options available in the Target tab are:

� Device Options

� Media Options

� General Options

Target Device Options� Any Device: When selected, NetVault uses an advanced algorithm to back up

using the most suitable device setup available for maximum efficiency. Youmay use Specify Device to restrict this action.

Page 187: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 175

� Specify Device: When selected, all devices available to the NetVault Serverare displayed in the device area, as shown in the following figure:

To clear the library or drive selection, click the square to its left. NetVault willuse one of the selected devices (shown with a green check mark) to performthe backup.

If you want to specify a target device using shared devices, see SharedDevices (page 63).

Target Media Options� Any Not in a group: When selected (the default), NetVault will use an

advanced algorithm to back up using the most suitable media available, whichis not in a group, for maximum efficiency. If ALL of your currently availablemedia has been allocated to a group using the Media Properties dialog box,the backup will halt with the message Waiting for Media, unless blank media isavailable.

Page 188: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

176 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

� Any: When selected, NetVault will use an advanced algorithm to back up usingthe most suitable media available to give maximum efficiency. You may useother Media Options to restrict this action, as required.

� MID: When selected, click the down arrow to list and select the Media Label(Media Identifier) of the specific item of media you would like to back up to.NetVault will only use this media for the backup.

� Group Label: When selected, click the down arrow to list and select the GroupLabel of the media you would like to back up to. NetVault will only use themedia belonging to this group for the backup.

� Label Media - Automatically label blank media: When cleared, suitablelabelled media must be available to NetVault or the backup will fail.

Page 189: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 177

When Label Media (Automatically label blank media) is selected, NetVaultautomatically labels and uses blank media, when no other suitable media isavailable for the job.

� Reuse Media: You can specify how media may be reused for the backup bychoosing one of the following options:

Never: Select if you never want any media marked for reuse to be used forthis backup.

Any: Select if you would like any media marked for reuse to be used for thisbackup, if necessary.

With same group label as target media: (Target Media By Group only).Select if you would like any media with the same Group Label, and marked forreuse, to be used for this backup, if necessary.

Target - General OptionsThe General Options allow a user to administer and protect the way media is used.

The options available under General Options are:

� Specify minimum space required on media before backup: Allows you tospecify the minimum amount of space that a piece of media must have beforeit is used (in Megabytes).

� Protect media from further writes after backup: This option can be used tostop any further backups from being placed on that media.

� Ensures this backup is the first on the media: This option ensures that thebackup is the first one on the media.

Page 190: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

178 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

Advanced OptionsThe Advanced Options tab provides options used only for advanced functions,including setting Backup Life, Compression, Verification, Duplication, Pre and PostScripts. For more information, refer to Chapter 16 - Using Advanced Features (page271)

The Advanced Options tab appears as shown in the following figure:

SavesetsIn the Selection, Schedule, Target Client and Advanced Options tabs you can savethe set of options specified, load an existing set of options and modify a loaded set ofoptions. These sets are known as Policy Sets and are managed from the individualtabs in the Backup and Restore windows or from the Policy Management window.

The following figure shows an example of the controls used to perform activities onsets in the Backup window:

Page 191: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 179

Complete information on using sets can be found in Using Policy (Set) Templates(page 263).

Incremental Backup Procedure

An Incremental backup job is always related to a previous backup job of the same selection.For File System backups, NetVault uses a Selection Set common to the Full andIncremental backup jobs as its method of relating the jobs to each other. Some softwareAPM’s do not use this method (e.g. Microsoft Exchange); please check the online helpinformation.

It is normal to schedule a weekly backup schedule comprising:

� A series of Full backup jobs to run once a week (e.g. on a Friday night, Saturday orSunday).

� A series of Incremental backup jobs to run on other working days (e.g. Monday,Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday) for each data selection for which there is a Fullbackup job.

This minimizes the amount of data being backed up, shortens the time required for thebackup window and reduces the media requirements.

Creating a Typical Weekly Full and Incremental ScheduleTo set up a typical weekly schedule of Full and Incremental backups for a FileSystem plugin (NT or UNIX), use the following steps:

1. Create a new backup job in the NetVault Backup window for a Full backup

2. Select the data to be backed up in the Selections tabbed area (if doing a filesystem backup, this is normally a complete drive, or one or more directories).

You may exclude certain files and/or directories in the selection, in the normalmanner (shown with a red cross). It is recommended that you exclude theRecycled bin under NT and the /proc directory under UNIX, in addition to tempor tmp directories.

3. Save the Selection Set with a suitable name.

4. Set up any other required options on the other tabbed areas, ensuring that FullBackup Type is selected on the Backup Options tab (the default option), andthat the Schedule tab is set as appropriate (e.g. Repeating every Friday at23:00).

5. Enter a descriptive name for the job in the Job Title box; one that indicateswhat is being backed up and that it is a Full backup.

6. Submit the Job (but do not close the NetVault Backup window).

7. Change the Backup Type in the Backup Options tab to either Incremental,Changed since last backup or Incremental, Changed since last FULLbackup, as appropriate.

Page 192: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

180 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

8. Change the Schedule as appropriate (e.g. to Repeating every Monday,Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday at 23:00). If required, you may change anyother tabbed areas, as appropriate.

9. Edit a descriptive job name in the Job Title box to replace the indication of Fullbackup type to the Incremental sub-type you have chosen (e.g. Inc_CSLBU, asan abbreviation for Incremental, Changed since last backup).

10. Submit the Job.

The job will be saved under a new Job Number because the Job Title has beenchanged.

You can use the Consolidate Backups plugin to combine Incremental Backupsinstead of doing periodic Full backups. For more information, see Using theConsolidate File System Backups Plugin (page 182).

Restoring Incremental Backups

NetVault uses an innovative method of displaying Incremental backups in the NetVaultRestore window, allowing ALL data in the selection to restored be in a single restore job(regardless of what saveset actually contains the data). See Restoring Incremental Backups(page 218) for more information.

Doing a Simple Backup

The NetVault Backup window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting backupjobs for any NetVault client.

The simplest form of backup (described here) is for the NetVault server to backup itself as aNetVault client. In this case, the NetVault client in the Selections tab will be an identical nameto the selected NetVault server.

Page 193: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 181

Note that no network is required for this type of backup as long as the device is locallyconnected.

To use the File System plugin to do a new backup, the basic procedure is detailed below.Before trying this procedure, ensure that you have successfully added a device (as detailedin Setting up a Device (page 63) and have blank media (or media with a NetVault label andsufficient space left) inserted in the device.

1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on thecommand toolbars, or by choosing Operations Backup.

2. In the Selections tab, open the client to be backed up.

3. Open the File System Plugin to display all drives and devices which may bebacked up on the selected client.

4. Select the data to be backed up, drives, directories and files, as required.

For this simple backup, you can ignore the Backup settings on the BackupOptions, Schedule, Target and Advanced Options tabs.

5. Enter a name for the job in the Job Title box.

6. Submit the backup by clicking the Submit button or by choosing AcceptSubmit Backup.

This simple backup will run immediately (i.e. it will be scheduled to run as soonas possible, using whatever device and media are available).

The progress of the job can be viewed in the NetVault Server Status window (orin the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window) by selecting the job andchoosing the Monitor Job command to display the Monitor Job information.

Page 194: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

182 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

Using the Consolidate File System Backups Plugin

The Consolidate File System Backups plugin is designed to eliminate the need to do Fullbackups. It produces a Full backup by using any number of incremental savesets back to thelast Full backup performed. The resulting saveset is the same as a Full backup performed atthe same time the last incremental was performed.

No special skills are required for routine backup operations or for using the plugin.

Installing the Consolidate File System Backups PluginThe Consolidate File System Backups plugin is included and automatically installedwhen you install NetVault and no further installation activity is required.

How the Plugin WorksFollow the steps in this example to understand how the Consolidate File SystemBackups plugin operates:

Consolidating BackupsNetVault consolidates File System backups using the incremental backupsperformed since the last full backup and creates a new full backup.

Day of theWeek

Operation Performed

Monday Full Backup

Tuesday Incremental

Wednesday Incremental

Thursday Incremental

Friday Incremental

Saturday Consolidate - This produces a Full backup from Friday’sIncremental back to and including Monday’s Full backup.

Monday Incremental

Tuesday Incremental

Wednesday Incremental

Thursday Incremental

Friday Incremental

Saturday Consolidate - This produces a Full backup from Friday’sIncremental back to and including the Full backup producedby the Consolidate performed on Saturday.

Page 195: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 183

To perform a consolidation of File System backups using the “Consolidate FileSystem Backups" Plugin, follow these steps:

1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on thecommand toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. TheNetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.

2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu ordouble-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.

Page 196: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

184 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

3. Double-click the Consolidate File System Backups plugin to open and displaythe Filesystem Backups folders:

4. Double-click each folder or file to open and display the backup savesets orbackup sets that you want to consolidate.

If you are consolidating with backups, proceed to the section Consolidating withBackups (page 185). To consolidate with Backup Sets go to Consolidating withBackup Sets (page 186).

5. Enter the name of the job in the Job Title box.

6. Submit the backup job by clicking the Submit button on the command toolbar.

See your NetVault Administrator’s Guide for information on viewing the jobstatus, progress and log.

NOTE: It is important to note that two devices are required to perform aconsolidated filesystem backup.

Page 197: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 185

Consolidating with BackupsA completely expanded Backup folder appears as shown in the following figure:

The Filesystem Backups folder lists all incremental backups performed on the clientusing the File System plugin. When you choose one of the savesets, NetVaultconsolidates all previous incremental savesets back to the last full backup created,resulting in a Full backup from the selected incremental’s date.

All Full backups produced when selecting an individual incremental backup arearchived and, therefore, will not affect the life of the last Full backup.

To consolidate with a Backup:

1. Select the desired backup saveset.

2. Select any additional options and click Submit.

Page 198: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

186 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

Consolidating with Backup SetsThe Backup Sets folder lists the Selection Sets used in backing up File System data,similar to that shown in the following figure:

The Filesystem Backup Sets folder lists the Selection Sets used to perform backupsfor the selected client. When you choose one of the Sets, NetVault finds theincremental savesets produced using that Selection Set back to the last Full backupcreated, and produces a new, Full backup.

This new Full backup is not an archive and does affect the life of the last Full backupperformed.

To consolidate with a Backup Set:

1. Select the desired Backup Set.

2. Select any additional options and click Submit.

Using the Raw Device Plugin

The Raw Device plugin, included with your NetVault installation, is used to backup andrestore physical disks and/or partitions.

No special skills are required for routine backup operations or for using the plugin.

Installing the Raw Device PluginThe Raw Device plugin is included and automatically installed when you installNetVault and no further installation activity is required. If you remove this plugin andlater wish to use it again, you must reinstall NetVault.

Page 199: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 187

Using the Raw Device Plugin for NTThe Raw Device plugin for Windows NT provides the ability to back up and restoreany physical disk or partition thereof. Partitions can be in any WinNT format (i.e.,NTFS, HPFS or FAT).

NT Raw Device BackupsTo perform a raw device backup in Windows NT, follow these steps:

1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on thecommand toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. TheNetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.

2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu ordouble-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.

3. Continue double-clicking each item until the desired disk/partition is displayed.

4. Select the items to be backed up. An example of Partition 2 (disk D) on PhysicalDisk 0 is shown in the following figure:

Page 200: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

188 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

5. Click the Backup Options tab to display the Raw Device backup options shown inthe following figure:

Options available in the Backup Options tab include:

� Backup Reported Disk Size: NetVault requests the size of the disk from theoperating system and only backs up that amount of data. The advantage of thisoption is that a restore to another hard disk is possible if the reported sizes arethe same, even if the actual sizes differ slightly. It is possible for applications touse the disk beyond the end of the reported size when using it for raw data. Ifthis is the case, it is recommended that you use the Backup Entire Contentsoption.

� Backup Entire Contents: With this option selected, NetVault backs up thewhole disk, even if it must read past the end of the reported size.

6. Continue selecting any desired job options and click Submit to start the backupjob.

CAUTION: When backing up a raw partition, it is important to ensure that it is notin use. Backing up a partition in use may result in a corrupted backup.

Page 201: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 189

NT Raw Device RestoresWhen restoring backed up data using the Raw Device plugin, note the followinginformation:

� If you are restoring a single drive (e.g., the C drive) then the target devicemust have a drive with same name.

� The target disk for a restore must be at least the same size (or larger than) thedata being restored.

� A backed up master boot record can be restored to a different location withouthaving to create the individual records or partitions.

� You can relocate backed up data to a designated disk number and partition.You must identify the target location by entering a disk identification and apartition number.

� A master boot backup can be relocated to any disk number, but must beplaced on that disk as the zero (0) partition. When you restoring an entire diskyou only need to identify the disk number.

To perform a restore using the Raw Device plugin, follow these steps:

1. Open the NetVault Restore window by clicking the Restore button on thecommand toolbar or by choosing the Operations Restore command.

2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu ordouble-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.

3. Double-click the Raw Device plugin to display the list of Savesets available forrestore.

4. Continue double-clicking until the desired disk/partition is displayed.

Page 202: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

190 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

5. Select the items to be restored. An example of the selection of Physical Disk 0,Partition 1 is shown in the following figure:

To restore the data to a different location, follow these additional steps:

6. Right-click the selected data and choose Rename, as shown in the followingfigure:

Page 203: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 191

The Restore - Rename dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure:

7. Select the Relocate To check box and enter the desired location in the edit box.You must identify the target location by entering a disk identification and apartition number. This can be in the format shown in the example (e.g., Disk1Partition4) or as just the disk and partition numbers (e.g., 1 4). In each case theentries must be separated by a space.

When the data being restored is relocated/renamed, the Restore Selections tabappears similar to the following example:

Page 204: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

192 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

8. Click the Target Client tab and select the client where the backed up data will berestored, as shown in the following figure:

9. There are no Restore Options for the Raw Device plugin. Select any othersettings as desired.

10. Enter a Job Title in the edit box.

11. Click the Submit button to start the job.

Using the Raw Device Plugin for UNIXThe Raw Device plugin for UNIX provides the ability to back up and restore characterand block devices.

UNIX Raw Device BackupsTo perform a Raw Device backup in UNIX, follow these steps:

CAUTION: Always unmount the file system before you back it up using the RawDevice plugin. If the file system remains mounted, and is accessed before thebackup completes, the backup may be corrupted. In this case the disk is markeddirty after a restore and you must perform a file system check.

Page 205: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 193

1. Open the NetVault Backup window by clicking the Backup button on thecommand toolbar or by choosing the Operations Backup command. TheNetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.

2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu ordouble-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.

3. Continue double-clicking each item in the tree to display the devices you want tobackup, as shown in the following figure:

4. There are no Backup Options for the Raw Device plugin on UNIX. Continueselecting any desired job options in the Schedule, Target or Advanced Optionstabs.

5. Enter a Job Title in the edit box.

6. Click Submit to start the backup job.

Page 206: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

194 Chapter 10Backing Up Data

UNIX Raw Device RestoresTo perform a restore using the Raw Device plugin, follow these steps:

1. Open the NetVault Restore window by clicking the Restore button on thecommand toolbar or by choosing the Operations Restore command. TheNetVault Backup window displays the list of clients in the Selections tab.

2. Select the desired client, right-click and choose Open from the pop-up menu ordouble-click the client to display the list of installed plugins.

3. Double-click the Raw Device plugin, and each item in its tree, to display the list ofSavesets available for restore, as shown in the following figure:

4. Select the data you want to restore.

Page 207: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 195

To restore the data to a different location, follow these additional steps:

5. Right-click the selected data and choose Rename, as shown in the followingfigure:

The Restore - Rename dialog box opens, as shown in the following figure:

6. Select the Relocate To check box and enter the desired location in the edit box.You must identify the target location by entering the full path to the new location.

7. There are no Restore Options for the Raw Device plugin. Select any othersettings in the Target Client, Schedule or Advanced Options tabs as desired.

8. Enter a Job Title in the edit box.

9. Click the Submit button to start the job.

Page 208: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 209: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 11

Restoring DataRestoring Data - 199

The NetVault Restore Window - 199

� Restore Window Buttons - 200� Window Tabs - 200� Menu Commands - 201� Using the Selections Tab - 202� Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection - 205� Using the Restore Search Facility - 209� Using Restore Filter Options - 210� Using the Restore Options Tab - 212� Using the Target Client Tab - 215� Using the Schedule Tab - 216� Using the Advanced Options Tab - 217� Savesets - 218

Restoring Incremental Backups - 218

Doing a Simple Restore - 221

Page 210: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 211: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 199

Restoring Data

A NetVault Restore is the name given for the transfer of data from the backup device (whichholds the required data) to the NetVault client. The device's media stores the data, where itcan be recovered from by NetVault. Note that the NetVault server itself also acts as aNetVault client so that it may restore data to itself.

The NetVault Restore Window

The NetVault Restore window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting restorejobs for any NetVault client controlled by the selected NetVault server.

Most restores are easy to create and submit. The NetVault Restore window provides accessto a number of control functions, some of which are required only under specialcircumstances.

The NetVault Restore window appears as shown in the following figure:

NOTE: With some optional NetVault plugins (particularly for certaindatabases) it is necessary to run NetVault restores entirely from the externalsoftware without using the NetVault Restore window.

Page 212: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

200 Chapter 11Restoring Data

Restore Window ButtonsThere are four buttons at the top of the Restore window that perform the followingfunctions:

Window TabsThe following tabs appear on the window:

� Selections: Used to select the data to be restored, using the appropriateNetVault Plugin or APM. Some NetVault Plugins are provided as part of thestandard installation, while APM’s are only available if installed separately. Formore information, see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).

� Restore Options: The Restore Options tab allows extra information for the jobto be specified, depending on the NetVault Plugin in use in the Selections tab.For a description of the more standard options, see Using the Restore OptionsTab (page 212).

� Target Client: Used to set which NetVault Client the data is to be restored to.You may Target any Client in the NetVault Domain of the selected NetVault

Click thisbutton

To do this:

Clear any current NetVault Restore selections and control set-tings and create a New Restore Job. Remember that you cancreate and save a restore job without submitting it.

Load an existing restore job, so that it may be modified, cop-ied, re-saved under the current or a new job number and sub-mitted. It is often easier to re-load a restore job by first finding itin the list in the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab list, selecting itand then choosing Edit/Modify. For more information, seeUsing the Jobs Tab (page 245).

Save the current restore job. Remember that you can accessthe saved job via the NetVault Job window, Jobs tab, as wellas clicking the Load button to reload it. It is very important forgood restore management that you save a restore job with ameaningful name as a Job Title. For more information, seeUsing the Jobs Tab (page 245).

Add the job to the scheduled jobs list (except for triggered jobswhich are just saved). Scheduled jobs are listed on the Statustab of the NetVault Jobs window and the Job Status area ofthe NetVault Server Status window. For more information, seeUsing The Status Tab (page 242).

NEW

LOAD

SAVE

SUBMIT

Page 213: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 201

Server. This option should only be used with caution, see Using the TargetClient Tab (page 215) for more information.

� Schedule: Used to specify when the job is to run. Jobs can be scheduled torun immediately, at a later date/time or run when triggered by a command lineor script command. You can also set a job to run once or to repeat. For fullinformation for both Backup and Restore JOB scheduling, see Using theSchedule Tab (page 216).

� Advanced Options: The options in the Advanced Options tab are only usedfor advanced functions, including setting Compression, Pre and Post Scripts.

Menu CommandsThe Menu Bar in the NetVault Restore window provides access to the commandsdescribed in the following table:

MenuChoose thiscommand:

To do this:

File New Creates a new restore job.

Load Opens the Load Restore Job dialogbox where you can select a saved jobthat you want to run again.

Save Saves the current restore job andassigns a job name.

Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box whereyou can select the desired printer andspecify its properties.

Close Close the Restore window.

View Selections Open the Selections tab.

Restore Options Open the Restore Options tab.

Schedule Open the Schedule tab.

Target Open the Target tab.

Advanced Options Open the Advanced Options tab.

Accept Submit Restore Starts the restore job.

Help Current Topic Display a description of and help forthe current focus item.

Help Contents Display the Help Contents.

Page 214: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

202 Chapter 11Restoring Data

Using the Selections TabThe Selections tab is used to select the data to be restored, using the appropriateNetVault Plugin or APM. Some NetVault Plugins are provided as part of the standardinstallation, while APM’s are only available if installed separately. For moreinformation, see Installing NetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).

The Selections tab of the Restore window appears as shown in the following figure:

Selecting the Data to be RestoredThe exact method used to select the data to be restored depends on the type ofNetVault Plugin being used. Refer to Using Help (page 5) to get more information onthe online Plugin Help installed with the plugin. Some standard methods are detailedhere.

Windows File System Plugin Data Selection ExampleThe following example demonstrates data selection using the Plugin SelectionMethod for Windows NT and 2000. For information on other methods, refer to SettingRestore Selection Method (page 208).

1. Select the Client, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the client).

2. Select the Plugin, right-click and choose Open (or double-click the plugin).

Page 215: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 203

3. Select the backup saveset containing the data to be restored, right-click andchoose Open (or double-click it). If you are not sure if the saveset contains thedata you are looking for, you can use the Search facility. For more information,see Using the Restore Search Facility (page 209).

4. Double-click the drive to open it. You can select the drive to be restored byclicking the square to its left. A selected item is indicated with a green checkmark.

5. Double-click the directory, and each subsequent level until the data you want torestore is displayed. Select the directory to be restored by clicking the square toits left.

The restore tree for this example saveset has now been fully expanded. TheSearch command allows you to search a particular saveset for a specific item

Page 216: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

204 Chapter 11Restoring Data

backed up. This is useful when a large number of directories and files arepresent; it does not search the selected file!

6. Select the data to be restored by clicking the square to the left of each item. Inthe following figure, the complete drive backup is selected:

Page 217: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 205

If you do not wish to include a file (or directory tree) in the selection, click thesquare to the left of the item until the red X appears:

Once the data has been selected, right-click and choose Rename on thehighest level selected. See Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection (page205).

Renaming or Relocating a Data SelectionAfter the data to be restored has been selected, you may be able to Rename (orRelocate) it by choosing the Rename command in the pop-up menu of the highestlevel selected in the Selections tree.

Here are some examples of Rename being used at different levels under the NTFile System Plugin:

Renaming a Drive for Restore1. Select the drive, right-click and choose Rename.

NOTE: This function does not operate for ALL NetVault plugins, but is usefulfor a File System restore (e.g. NT or UNIX File System plugin).

Page 218: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

206 Chapter 11Restoring Data

2. Click the square and enter the designated drive for the backup to be restored to(e.g. F:\ or F:) in the Rename to box. In the special case of drives ONLY,Rename to and Relocate to have an identical function.

Renaming a Directory for Restore1. Select the directory, right-click and choose Rename.

The Restore Rename dialog box opens.

To Rename: Select the Rename to check box and enter the desired name forthe restored backed up directory (e.g., _test9).

WARNING: The drive specified must exist or the restore will fail.

WARNING: Do not enter a path here or the restore will fail.

Page 219: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 207

To Relocate: Select the Relocate to check box and enter the path to thelocation where the backed up directory is to be restored (e.g. E:\temp).

Renaming a File for Restore1. Select the file, right-click and choose Rename.

The Restore Rename dialog box opens.

To Rename: Select the Rename to check box and enter the filename for thebacked up file to be renamed when it is restored (e.g. new_simple.htm).

To Relocate: Select the Relocate to check box and enter the path for thelocation where the backed up file is to be restored (e.g. E:\_test2).

WARNING: The path entered must exist at run-time or the restore will fail.

WARNING: Do not enter a path here or the restore will fail.

WARNING: The path entered must exist at run-time or the restore will fail.

Page 220: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

208 Chapter 11Restoring Data

Setting Restore Selection MethodYou may change the Selection Method by selecting a different option from the list:

The differences between Selection Methods is explained below:

� Plugin Selection Method: This is the default method which works with anybackup.

� Backup Set Selection Method: Shows backups saved using a Backup Set.For more information, see Using Policy (Set) Templates (page 263).

Page 221: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 209

� Job Selection Method: This method lists the backups by Job Title and workswith any backup.

Using the Restore Search FacilityNetVault provides a Restore Search facility to quickly examine the NetVaultDatabase and identify which backup saveset(s) data has been backed up in. Withthe Restore facility, you will find it easier to select the required data to restore.

You can search for data in many ways. The Search String entry field supports bothBasic and Regular Expressions search options.

Example of Basic SearchThe following example shows a Basic search expression:

This example shows a search for J?rgen*.doc. This search could be used to find allbacked up document files for Jurgen or Jergen - the star (*) before the extensionallows numbered files to be included in the search results, e.g:

Jurgen.doc

Jurgen_02.doc

Jurgen_03.doc

Jergen_04.doc

Page 222: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

210 Chapter 11Restoring Data

etc.

This example uses:

� A star (*) character to represent any number of characters.

� A question mark (?) character to represent any single character.

This search will not find Juegen.doc because the specified search string asks for anr in the third position of the file name.

Regular Expression Search

With Regular Expression Search selected, you can enter a Regular Expression inthe Search String. For more information, refer to Using Regular Expressions (page315).

Other Search Types

� Search. If you select Search at the relevant Search Level to set the scope (orboundary) containing the backed up data you are looking for.

� Client Level Search. If you select Search from a Client pop-up menu, ALLSavesets for the selected Client will be searched in all installed plugins.

� Plugin Level Search. If you select Search from a Plugin pop-up menu, ALLSavesets for the selected Plugin (under the relevant client) will be searched.

� Saveset Level Search. If you select Search from a Saveset pop-up menu, asingle selected Saveset under the relevant client and plugin will be searched.You can also select Saveset Level Search from the pop-up menu of anyselected drive, directory or file in the tree under the Saveset; only ONESaveset is searched.

Using Restore Filter OptionsThe data displayed in the Restore Options tab can be filtered using the options underFilter Options. By default, no filtering is selected.

Choose the type of Filter Options you require:

� By Date Range

� Show On-line Status

Page 223: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 211

or choose to Remove Filtering that has already been applied.

Filter By Date Range1. Select By Date Range and enter the required From and To dates. An example

of all the data listed is shown in the following figure:

2. Click the Apply Filter button. Only the data whose dates fall inside the specifieddate range are displayed, as shown in the following figure:

Page 224: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

212 Chapter 11Restoring Data

Show On-Line Status1. Select the Show On-line Status check box.

2. Click the Apply Filter button. The backup saveset icon of On-line media isdisplayed with a green flash indicator as shown in the following figure:

Using the Restore Options TabWhen available for the type of NetVault plugin being used in the Selections area,the Restore Options tab allows extra information for the job to be specified. For a FileSystem restore (e.g. NT, 2000 or UNIX File System plugin), the settings availableinclude whether or not to overwrite newer files, create backup files and restore filesmodified during backup and others. For some NetVault plugins, the settings availablemay include login details (e.g. Connect As, Password) to allow access to the clientarea that you wish to restore to.

Page 225: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 213

The following figure is an example of the Windows NT Backup Options:

For information on the specific Restore Options available for data selected in theSelections area using a particular NetVault plugin, please refer to the online PluginHelp which is installed with the plugin. Some standard options are detailed on thenext page.

Types of Restore OptionsThe standard restore options differ, depending on the operating system in use.

Windows NT File System Plugin Restore Options are shown in the following figure:

� By selecting Overwrite newer files, NetVault overwrites any files beingrestored of the same name, in the same path, on the target system (this is thedefault action). With Overwrite newer files cleared, no newer files will beoverwritten.

Page 226: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

214 Chapter 11Restoring Data

� By selecting Create backup files, NetVault renames the existing copies of anyfiles being restored with a '.bak' extension, before the restored file is written.With Create backup files cleared, no backup files will be created.

� By selecting Restore files modified during backup, NetVault restores a filemodified during a backup. A broken file icon indicates that a file was modifiedduring a backup.

Windows 2000 File System plugin Restore Options include those in the Windows NTFile System Options and many more, as shown in the following figure:

Encrypted data remains encrypted after the restore is performed. The AccountDetails area information is required when restoring encrypted files:

� Username: The username of the Administrators group. This must be anaccount in the group which has the “run as service” privilege.

� Password: The password for the Administrators username.

The Registry Files area allows you to:

NOTE: If you have backed up data through a mount point, and then performa restore, NetVault restores the data to its original location.

Page 227: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 215

� Update active registry: Enables the update of an active registry. To restorethe active registry the system must be rebooted in Active Directory RestoreMode.

� Restore to file: When this option is selected, data can be restored and/orrenamed to a specified location.

The Cluster Database area provides the options to:

� Force cluster database restore: If another node in the cluster has a copy ofthe cluster database and the system thinks this is the best copy, it willoverwrite the newly restored copy. Select this option to prevent the newlyrestored copy from being overwritten.

� Use original cluster database location: Select this option only when youwant to designate a new location for the restored data.

� Cluster Quorum Drive Letter: When specifying a new location, enter thedrive letter in the edit box.

Two additional settings in the Restore Options tab for Windows 2000 are:

� Apply changes made subsequent to Active Directory backup: Applieschanges made to the System State data since the backup was performed.

� Apply changes mad subsequent to Certificate Server backup: Applieschanges made to the Certification Services log files made since the backupwas performed.

UNIX Filesystem Restore Options include those shown in the Windows NTFilesystem Options and include one additional option, shown in the following figure:

� With Reset file datestamps cleared, files will be restored with a currentdatestamp. By selecting Reset file datestamps, all files will be restored withthe datestamp they were backed up with.

Using the Target Client TabThe Target Client tab is used to set which NetVault client the data is to be restoredto. You may Target any Client in the NetVault domain of the selected NetVaultserver. This option should be used with caution.

Page 228: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

216 Chapter 11Restoring Data

The Target Client tab appears as shown in the following figure:

The top NetVault client is always the NetVault server itself, acting as a NetVaultclient. With no clients selected, all restores are targeted to the client selected in theSelections tab. To target a specific client, select the check box to its left - selection ofall other clients will then be barred with a stop sign or be greyed out.

Using the Schedule TabThe Schedule tab is used to specify when the job is to run. Jobs can be scheduled torun immediately, at a later date/time or when triggered by a command line or scriptcommand. Options are also provided for setting a job to run once or to repeat. Forfull information for both backup and restore job scheduling, see Scheduling Backup& Restore Jobs (page 225).

Page 229: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 217

The Schedule tab of the Restore window appears as shown in the following figure:

Using the Advanced Options TabThe Advanced Options tab provides options only used for advanced functions,including setting Compression and Pre and Post Scripts. The use of these functionsis detailed in Using Advanced Features (page 271).

Page 230: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

218 Chapter 11Restoring Data

The Advanced Options tab of the Restore window appears as shown in the followingfigure:

SavesetsIn the Selection, Schedule, Target Client and Advanced Options tabs you can savethe set of options specified, load an existing set of options and modify a loaded set ofoptions. These sets are known as Policy Sets and are managed from the individualtabs in the Backup and Restore windows or from the Policy Management window.

The following figure shows an example of the controls used to perform activities onsets in the Backup window:

Complete information on using sets can be found in Using Policy (Set) Templates(page 263).

Restoring Incremental Backups

NetVault uses an innovative method of displaying Incremental backups in the NetVaultRestore window, allowing ALL data in the selection to restored in a single restore job,regardless of what saveset actually contains the data.

Page 231: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 219

The following example demonstrates how this concept works and included partial views ofthe NetVault Media Management and NetVault Restore windows. It might at first seem alittle complex, but once you understand the principle and functionality provided, it shouldbecome clear how to select the required data for restore.

1. A directory was created, E:\test, containing a single file file1.bin, about320 Kbytes. The directory was then backed up using a Selection Set and Fullbackup type (Job ID 24, stored as Saveset 46).

The backup saveset in the NetVault Media Management window displays aSegment 1 Length of 320 Kbytes:

The directory in the NetVault Restore window displays the single filefile1.bin in the directory, which may be selected for restore:

The file1.bin file is obviously part of the Full backup.

2. A new file file2.bin, about 320 Kbytes, was added to the directory E:\test,so the directory now contains two files, a total of 640 Kbytes. The directory wasthen backed up with the same Selection Set, but this time using a Incremental,Changed since last backup backup type (Job ID 25, stored as Saveset 47).

The backup saveset in the NetVault Media Management window displays aSegment 1 Length of 320 Kbytes (as only file file2.bin has changed):

Page 232: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

220 Chapter 11Restoring Data

The directory in the NetVault Restore window displays BOTH files file1.binand file2.bin in the directory, which may be selected for restore.

The file2.bin file is part of the first Incremental, Changed since lastbackup backup (Job ID 25, stored as Saveset 47). The file1.bin file isactually part of the Full backup (Job ID 24, stored as Saveset 46), but is alsodisplayed under Saveset 47 so any file in the directory at the time of backup canbe selected for restore.

3. A new file file3.bin, about 320 Kbytes, was added to the directory E:\test,so the directory now contains three files, a total of 960 Kbytes. Files file1.binand file2.bin where then both edited and re-saved so that they changed. Thedirectory was then backed up using the same Selection Set and Incremental,Changed since last backup backup job (Job ID 25, this time stored as Saveset48).

The backup saveset in the NetVault Media Management window displays aSegment 1 Length of 960 Kbytes (as all files: file1.bin, file2.bin andfile3.bin have changed):

Page 233: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 221

The directory in the NetVault Restore window displays ALL files file1.bin,file2.bin and file3.bin in the directory, which may be selected forrestore.

This time all files file1.bin, file2.bin and file3.bin are part of thesecond Incremental, Changed since last backup backup (Job ID 25, storedas Saveset 48). Again, any file in the directory at the time of backup can beselected for restore.

Files can be selected for restore, as detailed in the Windows File System PluginData Selection Example (page 202).

Doing a Simple Restore

The NetVault Restore window provides facilities for creating, editing and submitting restorejobs for any NetVault client.

The simplest form of restore (described here) is for the NetVault server to restore files toitself as a NetVault client. In this case, the NetVault client in the Selections tab will be anidentical name to the selected NetVault server (i.e. richard in this example).

Page 234: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

222 Chapter 11Restoring Data

Note that no network is required for this type of restore as long as the device is locallyconnected

.

To use the File Systems plugin to do a new restore, the basic procedure is detailed below.Before trying this procedure, ensure that you have the same device configuration and mediaas used for the backup. This simple procedure will overwrite any newer data with the datastored on the media, so ensure that you are not overwriting anything that matters.

1. Open the NetVault Restore window by clicking the Restore button on thecommand toolbars, or by choosing Operations Restore.

2. In the Selections tab, open the client that was backed up.

3. Open the File Systems plugin to display all backup savesets and then open thebackup saveset containing the data to be restored.

4. Select the data to be restored, drives, directories and files, as required.

For this simple restore, you can ignore the Restore settings on the RestoreOptions, Schedule, Target and Advanced Options tabs.

5. Enter a name for the job in the Job Title box.

6. Submit the restore by clicking the Submit button or by choosing Accept SubmitRestore.

Page 235: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 223

This simple restore will run immediately (i.e. it will be scheduled to run as soonas possible). Note that the simple restore will use the default Restore Option ofOverwrite newer files.

The progress of the job can be viewed in the NetVault Server Status window (orin the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window) by selecting the job andchoosing the Monitor Job command to open the Monitor Job information.

Page 236: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 237: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 12

Scheduling Backup & Restore JobsScheduling Jobs - 227

� Schedule Options - 227� Using Schedule - Immediate - 228� Using Schedule - Once - 228� Using Schedule - Repeating - 232� Using Schedule - Triggered - 237

Page 238: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 239: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 227

Scheduling Jobs

You can set up your backup and restore jobs to run at various times. The Schedule tab ofboth the Backup and Restore windows provides access to the scheduling options.

An example of the Schedule tab from the NetVault Backup window is shown in the followingfigure:

The options on the window are:

Schedule OptionsThe Schedule tab on both the Backup and Restore windows have identical optionbuttons to select the main functions:

Page 240: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

228 Chapter 12Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

The main schedule functions are:

� Immediate: Runs the job only once and as soon as possible. When submitted,the job is immediately added to the job queue and runs as soon as the rightdevice/media combination is available.

� Once: Runs a single scheduled function only once.

� Repeating: Runs a function whenever the specified hour, day, week, or monthoccurs.

� Triggered: Runs a job only when triggered by a special nvtrigger command.

Using Schedule - ImmediateWhen selecting the Immediate option, NetVault will execute, only once, the requiredNetVault function. If the resources (media, device, etc.) are available and no otherjob is running, the NetVault function will take place immediately. If there is a jobrunning or a job scheduled that takes precedence, the job will join a queue until it isable to run.

Using Schedule - OnceThe Once schedule option is used to execute a single scheduled function for theFIRST scheduled day or date specified.

Note that once means only one backup, or the FIRST scheduled.

Depending on the Method selected, additional information may be required. Optionsappearing on the Schedule tab for a single, non-recurring job are:

MethodAvailable options in the Method area are:

� Any Day: A job scheduled to run Once, Any Day depends on the

hour/minute entered in the Run at boxes , andthe day/month/year entered in the From boxes

.

NOTE: Note that once means only one backup, or the FIRST scheduled.

NOTE: Note that Repeating means that the selection will continue repeatinguntil discontinued. You can put a temporary Hold on a repeating job, andresume a held job, through the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window.

Page 241: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 229

� Days of week: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the week will runthe first time that day occurs in the month. This type of job depends on thedays selected in the Options list of days:

When the Days of week is the selected method, you can specify the Days inMonth as All or Selected.

� Days of month: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the month willrun on the days selected:

� Specified Date: A job scheduled to run on a specified date depends on theday/month/year entered in the Options date boxes:

Page 242: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

230 Chapter 12Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

Examples of Using Once Scheduling� Example 1: Days of the week

To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on All Saturdays during May 2000 From 11May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on 13 May 2000 ONLY):

� Example 2: Days of the week

To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on All Sundays, Tuesdays and Thursdaysduring May 2000, From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on14 May 2000 ONLY).

Page 243: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 231

� Example 3: Days of the week

To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on Selected Second and Last Saturdaysduring May 2000, From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job will run ONCE on 13 May 2000ONLY).

� Example 4: Days of the week

To schedule a job Once at 23:15 on Selected Third and Last Sundays,Tuesdays and Thursdays during May 2000, From 11 May 2000 (i.e. job willrun ONCE on 14 May 2000 ONLY).

Page 244: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

232 Chapter 12Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

� Example 5: Days of Month

To schedule a job at 10:29 on the 10 September 1998 the 10 in Options isselected (the 26 has also been selected to explain the effect this has):

The From field displays a date of 27 Aug 1998. Because the first specified dayof the month is 10, the job will be run in September rather than August.

Only the first date number in Options (in this case 10) after the date number inthe From field (in this case 27) is used; any other dates entered in Options(e.g. 26 in our example) are ignored.

Using Schedule - RepeatingThe Repeating option is used to execute a repeating scheduled function for eachscheduled hour, day, week, or month specified.

NOTE: Note that Repeating means that the selection will continue repeatinguntil discontinued. You can put a temporary Hold on a repeating job, andresume a held job, through the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window.

Page 245: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 233

Depending on the Method selected, additional information may be required. Optionsappearing on the Schedule tab for a repeating job are:

MethodAvailable options in the Method area are:

� Every Day: A job scheduled to repeat Every Day will run every

day at the hour/minute specified in the Run at boxesand begin on the day/month/year specified in the From boxes

.

� Days of week: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the week will runthe first time that day occurs in the month. This type of job depends on thedays selected in the Options list of days:

When the Days of week is the selected Method, you can specify the Days inMonth as All or Selected.

Page 246: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

234 Chapter 12Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

� Days of month: A job scheduled to run on a specified day of the month will runon the days selected:

� Every. . . : A job scheduled to run at a specified option, including every hour,day, week, and month:

Examples of Using Repeating Scheduling� Example 1: Days of the week

To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on All Saturdays during each monthFrom 1 Nov 1998 (i.e. job will run on 7, 14, 21, 28 November 1998, then on 5,12, 19, 26 December 1998, then on 2, 9, 16, 23, 30 January 1999, etc.):

Page 247: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 235

� Example 2: Days of the week

To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on All Sundays, Tuesdays andThursdays during each month From 10 Dec 1998 (i.e. job will run on 10, 13,15, 17, 20, 22, 24, 27, 29, 31 December 1998, then on 3, 5, 7, 10, 12, 14, 17,19, 21, 24, 26, 28, 31 January 1999, etc.).

� Example 3: Days of the week

To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on Selected Second and LastSaturdays during each month From 1 Nov 1998 (i.e. job will run on 14, 28November 1998, then on 12, 26 December 1998, then on 9, 30 January 1999,etc.).

Page 248: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

236 Chapter 12Scheduling Backup & Restore Jobs

� Example 4: Days of the week

To schedule a job Repeating at 23:15 on Selected Third and Last Sundays,Tuesdays and Thursdays during each month From 10 Dec 1998 (i.e. job willrun on 15, 17, 20, 27, 29, 31 December 1998, then on 17, 19, 21, 26, 28, 31January 1999, etc.):

� Example 5: Days of month

To schedule a job at 10:29 on the 10 and 26 of each month, From 27 Aug1998:

Note that the From field has a date of 27 Aug 1998. Because the first day ofthe month selected is 10, the job runs first in September rather than August. Ifthe From field had a date of 12 Aug 1998, the job would be run at 10:29 on the26 August 1998, then at 10:29 on the 10 September 1998, then at 10:29 on the26 September 1998, then at 10:29 on the 10 October 1998, etc.

Page 249: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 237

Using Schedule - TriggeredThe Triggered option is used to schedule the job to be started by the nvtriggercommand in the NetVault6/util directory. The Trigger name is a characterstring, which may be up to the maximum length allowed by your system.

For information on how to use the nvtrigger command to start a Triggered Job,please refer to Using Schedule - Triggered (page 237).

NOTE: When a Triggered job is submitted, it is NOT added to the scheduledjobs, but only saved (same effect as using the Save button). You may viewall of the triggered jobs in the Jobs tab of the NetVault Jobs window. SeeUsing the Jobs Tab (page 245).

Page 250: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 251: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 13

Job ManagementManaging Jobs - 241

� Job Management Tabs - 241� Using The Status Tab - 242� Using the Jobs Tab - 245� Using the History Tab - 247

Page 252: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 253: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 241

Managing Jobs

Each time you start a job, NetVault starts the Job Manager which oversees and coordinatesthe job. The Job Manager runs on the NetVault server, and monitors plugins and devicemanagers on other machines, as necessary, to complete a task.

The NetVault Jobs window displays information about all the jobs submitted by the selectedNetVault Server: completed, running and scheduled.

The NetVault Jobs window is shown in the following figure:

Job Management TabsInformation available in each of the tabs in the Jobs Management window isdescribed in the following table:

Window Tab Provides Information about:

Status Jobs controlled by the NetVault server. Running and sched-uled jobs can also be controlled in this tab.

Jobs All jobs created by the NetVault server. Jobs listed here arenot necessarily active; jobs created and saved (but not submit-ted) in the Backup or Restore windows appear only in thisarea.

Page 254: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

242 Chapter 13Job Management

Using The Status TabThe Status tab displays a list of all scheduled, running and recent jobs. Dependingon the current job status, jobs can be viewed, monitored, edited or aborted in theStatus tab.

Job Status IdentificationJobs are displayed in different colors, depending on their status:

The colors can be changed in the NetVault Configurator, GUI tab. For moreinformation about using the NetVault Configurator, see Understanding the NetVaultConfigurator Dialog Box (page 32).

Log Entry HeadingsEach log entry contains information under the following headings:

History The chronological list of all jobs run and controlled by theNetVault server (on any NetVault client)

Icon Indicates:

Cyan Blue Jobs scheduled, but not yet running.

Yellow Jobs currently running.

White Jobs completed (not necessarily successfully).

Dark Blue Selected Job (right mouse button for options).

Heading Description:

Time Shows when the job was/is scheduled to run, at the time it wassubmitted.

Job Title The name of the job as entered in the field in the NetVaultBackup or NetVault Restore window when the job was submit-ted.

Id The job identification number assigned to the job when it wasfirst submitted. If the same job is submitted again, this numberwill be the same, but the Instance number will be incremented.

Instance A number representing the number of times that this particularjob has been submitted. The first time a new job is submitted,the number is always 1, the second time it is 2, etc. (even ifyou have used View/Edit Job to modify the job in betweensubmissions, provided you do not change the job title).

Window Tab Provides Information about:

Page 255: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 243

Status Pop-up Menu CommandsCommands in the Status tab vary, depending on the type of job: Scheduled,Running and Completed.

Scheduled Job Commands

Scheduled jobs appear in the Jobs Management window as shown in the followingfigure:

The commands available on the right-click popup menu are:

Phase When the NetVault Backup Advanced Option, Duplicateoption is turned on, the duplicate job is allocated the same JobID and Job Title as the backup job, but the Phase for the dupli-cate job will read 2 (so that the duplicate can be identified). Inall other cases, the Phase of jobs will read 1.

Status The current condition of the job (e.g. Scheduled, On Hold,Running, Backup Completed, etc.). For more information onthe job, right-click it and choose the Monitor Job and/or ViewLog commands.

Choose thiscommand:

To do this:

Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window.This allows all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied toa new job. You may also double-click the log entry to performthe same function.

DeleteSchedule

Delete the job schedule. Note that the job itself is not deletedand continues to appear in the Jobs area. If necessary you canload the job into the appropriate backup or restore window andre-submit it later.

Heading Description:

Page 256: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

244 Chapter 13Job Management

Running Job Commands

Running jobs appear in the Jobs Management window as shown in the followingfigure:

The commands available on the right-click pop-up menu are:

Hold Put a temporary hold on the scheduled job. After selection, thismenu item changes to Resume which may be selected to re-activate the job as scheduled.

Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job tothe job queue to run it as soon as possible.

Choose thiscommand:

To do this:

Monitor Job Open the Job Monitor window for the selected job. This pro-vides both Job Information and Data Transfer information asthe job progresses. You may also double-click the log entry toperform the same function.

View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all logentries).

Abort Job Abort a running job. After selection, an Aborting Job dialog boxopens. The job Status is shown as Aborted by user.

Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window toallow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a newjob.

Choose thiscommand:

To do this:

Page 257: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 245

Completed Job Commands

Completed jobs appear in the Jobs Management window as shown in the followingfigure:

The commands available on the right-click pop-up menu are:

Using the Jobs TabThe Jobs tab displays a list of all jobs in the NetVault database. The jobs do nothave to be currently active; for example, you can create a series of backup jobs inthe NetVault Backup window, saving each job with a different name, withoutsubmitting them. When you want to submit the job, load it into the Backup windowand click the Submit button.

Choose thiscommand:

To do this:

View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all logentries).

Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window toallow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a newjob.

Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job tothe job queue to run it as soon as possible.

Page 258: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

246 Chapter 13Job Management

The Jobs tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Jobs Pop-up Menu CommandsRight-clicking on an entry opens a menu with the following options:

Choose thiscommand:

To do this:

View Log View the log for the selected job. Use the filter options to dis-play the required level of information (e.g. All to show all logentries).

Delete Delete the selected job on confirmation. The job will either bedeleted, or a dialog box opens informing you that the Job isActive. Active jobs (i.e. jobs shown in the Status list as eitherscheduled or running) cannot be deleted. If you want to deletethe job, Abort any instances of the running job first.

Edit/View Job Load the job into the appropriate Backup or Restore window toallow all the settings to be viewed, modified or copied to a newjob.

Run Now Run the job immediately. Note that this option adds the job tothe job queue to run it as soon as possible.

Page 259: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 247

Using the History TabThe History tab displays a list of all jobs which have been run. The Status columnshows whether or not they have completed (Backup or Restore), or have beenaborted by the user.

The History tab is shown in the following figure:

History Pop-up Menu CommandsWhen you select an entry in the History log, right-click and choose View Log, theNetVault Logs window opens. Choose View>Set Filters to display the requiredlevel of information (e.g. All to show all log entries

Page 260: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

248 Chapter 13Job Management

If you want to apply filters to the logs, choose View>Set Filters. When the FilterOptions dialog box opens, select the options (e.g. All to show all log entries) that youwant to apply, then click OK.

Select All to showall log entries

Page 261: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 14

Using LogsUsing Logs - 251

The Logs Window - 251

� Logs Window Buttons - 252� Using the Logs Window - 252� Viewing Extended Logs - 254� More Info - Job Messages - 255� More Info - Warnings - 256� More Info - Errors - 257� Filtering Logs - 258� Using the Filter Options Dialog Box - 259

Page 262: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 263: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 251

Using Logs

The NetVault server has a logging service that is used to centralize all the logs in a NetVaultdomain. This means that logs from the server and the clients are gathered into one centrallocation. To ensure that logging can continue even when the system is low on disk space,the logging manager pre-allocates disk space.

Operational logging for processes controlled by the selected NetVault server are displayedin the NetVault Logs window. A specific job can be easily identified, along with theprocesses that occur during it. Jobs can be viewed as they progress.

The Logs Window

The NetVault Logs window is opened by clicking the Logs button on the command toolbars,or by choosing the Operations Log command.

The NetVault Logs window appears as shown in the following figure:

Each log message is preceded with a color-coded dot signifying its level of importance. Logscan be filtered to display the required level of detail (either higher or lower than the defaultview).

Page 264: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

252 Chapter 14Using Logs

Logs Window Buttons

There are two buttons at the top of the screen:

Using the Logs WindowThe display area shows the filtered logs in chronological order. For more information,see Filtering Logs (page 258).

Command MenusThe screen has menus for:

Click thisbutton:

To do this:

Set Filters

Open the Filter Options dialog box (see Using the FilterOptions Dialog Box (page 259)) where you can set therequired level of detail to be displayed in the logs screen.

Dump Logto File

Dump the logs to a file, in either ASCII text or binary format.The binary format file can be reloaded into a NetVault Logswindow and re-examined at a later date (enabling all the filter-ing functions to be used); it can be used by NetVault TechnicalSupport (page 6) should there be a problem that needs investi-gating.

MenuChoose thiscommand:

To do this:

File Printer Setup Open the Print Setup dialog boxwhere you can select the desiredprinter and specify its properties.

Print Open the Print dialog box where youcan choose the desired printer andproperties before printing.

Close Close the window.

View Set Filters Open the Filter Options dialog box toset the level of detail you want to dis-play.

Options Dump Log to File Save the current logs so they may bearchived and then the active logspurged.

Select Logs Source Select the logs source to be displayedin the NetVault Logs window.

Page 265: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 253

The Logs Display AreaThe NetVault Logs window displays log entries for processes controlled by theselected server. Each log message is preceded with a color-coded dot, whichsignifies the message's level of importance:

Purge Logs Purge (delete) logs back to a specifieddate from the system. Should only beused if the logs have been dumped toa binary file and archived for possiblefuture reference.

Help Current Topic Display help on the current topic.

Help Contents Open the help system.

Display Dots Description:

Green

Background logs provide background information about theNetVault System and NetVault functions.

Blue

Information logs provide general details about a current orcompleted NetVault function, this includes details on Sched-ule, Media and the System. For example, the Information Logsinform you when a device is online and has media available.

Purple

Job Message logs provide details about a current or com-pleted NetVault job. These logs inform you that a job hasstarted and completed. They also detail the procedures thathave been carried out by the device and its media.

Yellow

Warning logs provide information about incidents that mayinterfere with a scheduled NetVault function, and could requiresome operator intervention.

Red

Error logs contain important information about problems thatmay have caused a NetVault function to fail.

Red

Severe Error logs contain the most serious information aboutcritical problems that have lead a NetVault function to fail.

MenuChoose thiscommand:

To do this:

Page 266: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

254 Chapter 14Using Logs

The log dots will sometimes contain an exclamation mark. By double-clicking theexclamation mark additional information is displayed in a dialog box.

When viewing the NetVault Logs window, you only want to see a specific type of log,unnecessary logs can be removed by clicking the Log Filter button.

Viewing Extended LogsExtended log information is displayed in a dialog box when a dot with an exclamationmark is double-clicked, as illustrated in the following figures:

Double-clickthis dot:

To display:

Purple

A Transfer Information dialog box for the job. See More Info -Job Messages (page 255).

Yellow

A View Log Context dialog box for the warning. See More Info- Warnings (page 256).

Red

A View Log Context dialog box for the error will appear. SeeMore Info - Errors (page 257).

Page 267: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 255

More Info - Job Messages

Double-click a Job Message with an exclamation mark for Transfer Information.

Page 268: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

256 Chapter 14Using Logs

More Info - WarningsDouble-click a Warning with an exclamation mark to View Log Context.

Page 269: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 257

More Info - ErrorsDouble-click an Error Message with an exclamation mark to View Log Context.

Page 270: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

258 Chapter 14Using Logs

Filtering LogsTo see all of the log entries for a job:

1. Open the NetVault Logs window.

2. Click the Filter button to open the Filter Options dialog box.

Page 271: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 259

3. Change Warning Levels to All, and click OK - all log entries are listed in theNetVault Logs window, shown in the following figure:

Using the Filter Options Dialog BoxThe Filter Options dialog box provides different methods of filtering the logs inseparate areas.

The Filter Options dialog box appears as shown in the following figure:

Page 272: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

260 Chapter 14Using Logs

The following information provides an overview of the filter options available:

� From: Select either the First Event option button or the Specify Time optionbutton for a particular date and time.

� To: Select either the Last Event option button, or the Specify Time optionbutton for a particular date and time.

� Warning Levels: The Warning Levels determine the level of detail displayedwith All for maximum detail, and Severe Errors Only for minimum detail. JobMessages is the default setting.

� Classes: By default all Classes of log are selected.

By clicking the title of a Class, the log messages belonging to that Class can beprevented from appearing. The same procedure applies if the logs are notselected and you wish to view them.

Each Class contains specific log information, detailed in the table below:

� Clients: By default, NetVault selects all the NetVault clients referenced in thelog files. All the log information for these clients is displayed in the NetVaultLogs window. If you do not require logs about all the clients, unwanted clientlogs can be filtered out by clearing the specific Client box.

If just one client is selected, only the logs relating to this client are available forviewing. If another client is selected, the logs of both these clients aredisplayed. This process continues until all the clients are selected; however, if

TIP: The quickest way of viewing a log for a particular job is to right-click it inthe NetVault Jobs window and choose View Log; that way the NetVaultLogs window is already filtered to show information for the selected job only.For more information, see Using the Jobs Tab (page 245).

Class Description

System Messages relating to the Operating System

Schedule Messages relating to when the backup or restore occurs.

Jobs Messages relating to information produced for a specific job.

Media Messages relating to the media.

Devices Messages relating to the device(s).

Database Messages relating to the NetVault database entries.

Data Plugins Messages relating to the data plugin being used.

GUI Messages relating to the Graphical User Interface.

Page 273: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 261

no clients are selected, the log information relating to any clients will bevisible.

� Jobs: If the Filter On Job check box is selected, only the logs relating to theJob ID specified are displayed. If the Filter On Job check box is cleared, thelogs for all jobs are shown, as moderated by other filter options.

� Text: If the Filter on Text check box is selected, and a text string is entered inthe field, only log entries containing that text (case insensitive) in the LogMessages field are displayed. If the Filter on Text check box is, the jobscontaining any Log Message text will be shown, as moderated by other filteroptions.

Page 274: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 275: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 15

Using Policy (Set) TemplatesWhat are Policy (Set) Templates? - 265

Types of Policy Sets - 265

� Backup and Restore Job Sets - 265� Backup Job Sets - 265� Restore Job Sets - 266� Standard Policy (Set) Operations - 266� Saving a Set using the Save As button - 267� Loading a Set using the Load button - 268� Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box - 268� Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded) - 269� Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (Set Loaded) - 269� Guidelines for using Schedule Sets - 270

Using Policy Management - 270

Page 276: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 277: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 265

What are Policy (Set) Templates?

NetVault uses Policy (Set) facilities to save Templates for frequently used selections. APolicy (Set) is a collection of options defined for a job, or portion of a job, that you save to bere-used later.

A selection Set can be saved and re-used in many different backup or restore jobs, so that ifthe selection needs to be modified it can be done in one place and all jobs using the set willautomatically be updated.

The Set facilities are similar in action to a book style or template file used with a wordprocessor or DTP application for book production; a style can be changed in one place andall the chapters of the book are automatically updated (rather than have to update eachchapter individually).

Types of Policy Sets

The following sets are available:

Backup and Restore Job Sets

Backup Job Sets

Set Description:

Schedule Set(date/time selection)

Save the date and time that the job is to run, andwhether or not it is to be repeating.

Set Description:

Backup Selection Set(data selection)

Save a specific data selection.

Backup Target Set(device, media and generaloptions)

Save specific Backup Targets.

Backup AdvancedOptions Set(compression, pre & postscript options)

Save specific Advanced Options settings.

Page 278: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

266 Chapter 15Using Policy (Set) Templates

Restore Job Sets

Standard Policy (Set) OperationsAll Backup and Restore Sets use Standard Set (Policy) Control Functions. Thefollowing example shows the Schedule Set, common to both the Backup andRestore windows. The operations are the same for all policy sets.

Set Controls and Functions

Set Description:

Restore Selection Set(data selection)

Save a specific data selection.

Restore AdvancedOptions Set(compression, scripts selec-tion)

Save specific Advanced Options settings.

Set Control Description:

Displays the name of the currently loaded set (if any). Youcannot type directly in this field.

Loads a previously saved set.

Saves the current settings as a new set.

Deletes the currently loaded set. This button is greyedwhen no set is loaded or when Modify is not selected.

Allows the currently loaded set to be modified or copied.Once selected for modify, you cannot clear the modifyselection; if you change your mind, load the set again torestore the original settings.

Page 279: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 267

Saving a Set using the Save As button1. In the appropriate window and tab (in this example, the Schedule tab of the

NetVault Backup window), select the options required for the set and then clickSave As.

2. Enter a meaningful name for the set, for instance Every 14th & last of Month, inthe Save Schedule Set dialog box:

3. Click OK to save it, or Cancel to abort the operation.

Page 280: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

268 Chapter 15Using Policy (Set) Templates

Loading a Set using the Load button1. In the appropriate window and tab (in this example, the Schedule tab of the

NetVault Backup window), click Load.

2. Select the set you want to load (in this example, the Weekdays at 1900 set).

3. Click OK to load this set.

Modify/Copy a Set Using the Modify Check Box1. With a set loaded (in this example, Weekdays at 1900), select the Modify check

box.

A Warning dialog box opens, displaying the following message:

� Modify Selected: The loaded set (in this example, Weekdays at 1900) maynow be modified and the Modify button is available. Change the selections asrequired. All settings will be saved when you Submit this job, or click the SaveAs button.

� Copy Selected: The previously loaded set (in this example, Weekdays at1900) has now been copied - NO SET IS CURRENTLY LOADED. Change theselections as required. All settings will be saved when you Submit this job andno set will be defined. Click Save As to save the selections under a new setname.

� Cancel: To abort the loading of the set, click Cancel or close the messagedialog box.

Page 281: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 269

Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No Set Loaded)Deleting a set is made deliberately difficult to prevent accidental erasure.

1. In the appropriate window and tab (in this example, the Schedule tab of theNetVault Backup window), click Load to load the set to delete.

2. Select the set you want to load for deletion (in this example, the Weekdays at1900 set).

The set will be loaded.

3. With the set loaded for deletion, select the Modify check box. The Deletebutton is now available.

A Warning message appears, offering you the options to Modify the loaded set,Copy it, or Cancel the operation, which is the same as that of the Modify/Copya Set Using the Modify Check Box (page 268).

� Click Modify to allow the set to be deleted.

� Click Delete to delete the set upon confirmation:

4. Click Yes to delete the set, or No to cancel deletion.

Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (Set Loaded)This procedure is the same as Deleting a Set Using the Delete Button (No SetLoaded) (page 269), unless you have already selected the Modify check box, andthen clicked the Modify button.

Page 282: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

270 Chapter 15Using Policy (Set) Templates

Guidelines for using Schedule SetsWhen a backup or restore is to be regularly performed using a specific Schedule(Immediate, Once, Repeating, Triggered), it is recommended that you save theselection set with a suitably descriptive name that is easy to recognize. This allowsyou to quickly re-load the selection for use in different backup or restore jobs.

The following example shows the Load Schedule Set dialog box:

Important information to remember:

� The most important aspects of the schedule selection are named.

� The schedule can be any combination of Immediate, Once, Repeating,Triggered.

� It is not practical to identify all of the schedule selections made from the setname. If you are not sure if you have loaded the correct settings, check themcarefully before submitting or saving the backup.

� The wording At... on ... has been used for a Once schedule.

� The wording Every... has been used for a Repeating schedule.

� The wording Triggered by... has been used for a Triggered schedule andwhere the trigger string is more than one word it has been put in double quotes("...").

Using Policy Management

Use the Policy Management window to control server selections, scheduling, and targetdevice options for backup jobs. Although you can define and store policy sets for restorejobs, they are not as frequently accessed and therefore are not displayed in the PolicyManagement window. You’ll notice that the Policy Management window is similar to theNetVault Backup and Restore windows. Open the Policy Management window by choosingthe Administration Policy Management command in the main NetVault GUI.

Page 283: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

CHAPTER 16

Using Advanced FeaturesWhat are Advanced Features? - 273

Using the Advanced Options Tab - 273

� Backup Life (Backup only) - 274� Compression (Backup and Restore) - 274� Verify after Backup (Backup only) - 275� Duplication (Backup only) - 275� NetVault Jobs, Pre & Post Scripts Execution Logic - 280

Working with Firewalls - 288

Page 284: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 285: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 273

What are Advanced Features?

Advanced options provide control over such features as the life of a backup, compression offiles, data verification after backup, duplication and pre and post scripts.

Both the NetVault Backup and NetVault Restore windows have an Advanced Options tab.This chapter describes the use of these facilities and the Trigger function on the Scheduletab.

Using the Advanced Options Tab

The Advanced Options tab on both the Backup and Restore windows appears as shown inthe following figure:

Options available on the Advanced Options tab are:

� Backup Life

� Compression

� Verification

� Duplication

� Pre and Post Scripts

Page 286: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

274 Chapter 16Using Advanced Features

Backup Life (Backup only)The Backup Life frame provides control over exactly how long a backup will live.When you submit a backup, you have the option to give that backup a life other thanthe infinite default life.

Options available under Backup Life appear as shown in the following figure:

A backup life can be defined in the following ways:

� Backup - Discard after n Full Backups: This option allows you to specify thenumber of generations of backups you want to keep. A backup is defined by aBackup Set. Once the specified number of full backups for a given Backup Sethas been exceeded, the oldest backups are discarded. See also Backup Life(Backup only) (page 274).

� Backup - Discard after time: Allows you to specify how long to keep a backupbefore it is discarded. The duration of the media's usefulness is dependent onthe specified time interval number for the selected Days, Weeks or Yearsoption button.

� Archive - This option is a stand-alone backup. Incremental backups can not bebased on it and its life can only be set by time, not generations (number of fullbackups).

Compression (Backup and Restore)Select the Network Compression check box when you want to reduce thebandwidth on a network when the files are transferred. When this option is selected,additional CPU time is required to compress the files.

A single option under Compression appears as shown in the following figure:

NOTE: You can use both of the backup options at the same time. The first tobe satisfied causes the backup to be retired.

Page 287: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 275

When Network Compression is selected, the following occurs:

� Backup Compression - Data is compressed on the NetVault clientcontaining the backup selection before it is transmitted over the network, thendecompressed on the client with the selected device attached.

Note that when a backup is to a Distributed Device (i.e. a device connected toa different NetVault machine to the NetVault server) it can be useful to setNetwork Compression ON for a backup of any other NetVault machine(including the NetVault server itself).

� Restore Compression - Data is compressed on the NetVault client with thedevice attached before it is transmitted over the network, then decompressedon the client to which data is being restored.

Note that when a restore is from a Distributed Device (i.e. a device connectedto a different NetVault machine to the NetVault server) it can be useful to setNetwork Compression ON for a restore to any other NetVault machine(including the NetVault server itself).

Verify after Backup (Backup only)Select the Verify after Backup check box to confirm that a backup has completedsuccessfully. When a backup has completed, the data transfer is checked and a jobmessage is created in the NetVault Job Log stating that the 'backup job has verifiedsuccessfully'. With Verify after Backup selected, the job runs more slowly.

The Verification frame is shown in the following figure:

Duplication (Backup only)Select the Duplicate check box to copy a backup, either immediately after thebackup has completed, or a later time. The duplication copies the backup from onepiece of media to another. You must define Policy (Sets) for the Schedule andTarget in order to use this feature.

NOTE: The Data Copy plugin is another way to duplicate backups notassociated with a backup job. See *** for more information on the Data Copyplugin.

Page 288: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

276 Chapter 16Using Advanced Features

Options under Duplication appears in the following figure:

Once a backup is duplicated, NetVault treats the duplicate as another instance of thesame data. The only difference between the duplicate and the original is that theduplicate can be given a different Backup Life from the original backup.

When the Media Manager is given a restore request for data that has beenduplicated, it will use the copy that is most convenient for the task.

Options available under Duplication:

� Migrate (Discard original backup) - With Migrate (Discard original backup)selected, as soon as the duplicate has been created, the original backup isdiscarded (i.e. future backups may overwrite it). This option is used when abackup is to be made to the most efficient device (e.g to a hard disk as apseudo library, or a fast tape drive) to minimize the required 'backup window',the backup is then migrated to a different device (e.g. a slower tape library) inthe background and the fast device freed for another operation.

� Use Originals Life - With Use Originals Life selected, the duplicate is createdwith a Backup Life identical to that of for the original backup under BackupLife.

� Discard after time - With Discard after time selected, the duplicate is createdwith the new Backup Life that you select in this area. The duration of themedia's usefulness is dependent on the interval number entered in the fieldand the selected Days, Weeks or Years option button.

� Using Schedule Set - To set the time for the duplicate, select the relevantschedule from the Using Schedule Set list.

Page 289: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 277

If a suitable schedule is not already in this list, click the Manage button toopen the NetVault Schedule Management window, shown in the followingfigure, where you can create, modify or copy a Schedule Set.

Select the desired schedule option button, and choose the appropriatesettings. See Schedule Options (page 227) for more information.

When you click OK, the schedule set shown as loaded in the screensSchedule Set field is displayed in the Duplication Schedule Set field.

� Using Target Set: To set the target for the duplicate, select the relevant targetfrom the Using Target Set list.

Page 290: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

278 Chapter 16Using Advanced Features

If a suitable target is not already in this list, click the Manage button to open theNetVault Target Management window, shown in the following figure, where youmay create, modify or copy a Target Set.

The window is identical to the Target tab in the Backup window. For moreinformation, see Using the Target Tab (page 174).

Click OK and the set shown as loaded in the screens Target Set field isdisplayed in the Duplication Target Set field.

Pre and Post Scripts (Backup and Restore)You can run a stored script prior to or after a backup or restore job.

A Pre Script is run before the NetVault job. For example, a Pre Script could be usedto close down a database prior to the start of a backup, insuring that no files arechanging as the backup is carried out.

Page 291: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 279

A Post Script is run after the NetVault job. It could be used to re-start anyprocesses closed down by the Pre Script.

Using ScriptsScripts must be an executable file for the operating system in use (for example,under Microsoft Windows NT you may use filename.bat, filename.exe,filename.com, or if Perl is installed filename.pl).

Please note the following important points:

� All scripts must reside in the NetVault/scripts directory. If this directory doesnot already exist, you must create it and copy your scripts into it beforeattempting to use them with NetVault.

� When entering the script name, the filename and the extension exists must beentered (for example myprescript.bat, startdb.exe).

� Do not enter absolute paths in the script name fields. You can enter pathsrelative to the NetVault6/scripts directory, if you want to organize your scriptsin subdirectories, (e.g. dbscripts/startdatabase.bat).

� Be careful how you use the parameter field. Whatever is entered into theparameter field is passed to the script via the NV_USER_ARG EnvironmentalVariable; this is a string up to the maximum length that your system willsupport. Do not enter quotation marks or escape characters in this field.

� If using a script running under Microsoft Windows NT - Use nvexitstatus (in theNetVault\util directory) to provide the return value from the script.

NetVault Environmental VariablesThe following environmental variables are available:

� NV_HOME - The path to the root of the NetVault directory.

� NV_JOBID - The numeric job identifier assigned to the job by NetVault.

� NV_STATUS - The exit status of any previous phase of a job. This will eitherbe SUCCEEDED or FAILED. For example, in a Post Script to a filesystembackup, NV_STATUS will have a value of SUCCEEDED if the backupsucceeded or FAILED if it failed. If the script is run as the first phase of a job(i.e. as a Pre Script), then this variable has no value.

Page 292: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

280 Chapter 16Using Advanced Features

� NV_USER_ARG - Contains whatever value(s) were typed in the UserParameter field when the script was entered. This is a string up to themaximum length that your system will support.

Example ScriptsPlease refer to:

� Example Scripts under Windows NT (page 280).

� Example Script under UNIX (page 284).

NetVault Jobs, Pre & Post Scripts Execution LogicNetVault executes NetVault jobs, Pre and Post Scripts according to the followingexecution logic:

** Without a post script the job will fail with a message in the NetVault Jobs window,Status area such as Backup Failed or Failed to write segment.

With a post script, using the correct exit status reporting, the job will be shown asBackup Failed. The post script is always run, if the job runs, so that processesstopped with a pre script can be re-started, even if the NetVault job fails.

Example Scripts under Windows NTA Status batch file script to net report job completion status to another machine.

@echo off

rem status.bat

rem Richard Benton 19990422

rem

rem @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@

rem @ Job Phase Status Report Batchfile @

rem @ Call with Advanced Option, Post Script @

rem @ to net report job completion status @

rem @ Name: status.bat User Parameter: <NONE> @

Process Results

Pre Script Success Success Success Fail

NetVault Job Success Success Fail Not Run

Post Script Success Fail Success Not Run

Result Job com-pletesnormally

Job CompletesWith Post ScriptError

Job failsbut post scriptruns and reportserror**

Job fails withpre scripterror

Page 293: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 281

rem @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@

rem

rem @@@ Standard Reporting (for all batch jobs) @@@

echo.

echo The home directory of NetVault (NV_HOME) = %NV_HOME%

echo.

echo The NetVault Job ID (NV_JOBID) = %NV_JOBID%

echo.

echo The user argument (NV_USER_ARG) = %NV_USER_ARG%

echo.

echo Previous job phase status (NV_STATUS) = %NV_STATUS%

echo

rem @@@ Previous Job Reporting (for log) @@@

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo YES! - The backup succeeded!

if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED echo OH NO! - The backup FAILED!

rem @@@ Main Actions (Using net reporting) @@@

rem @@@@ Edit next line for correct machine to Net report to @@@@

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID%completed"

if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID% FAILED"

goto end

rem Any other command batch file labels go here.

:end

echo End of Particular Batch File Actions

rem Return nonzero exit state if previous NetVault job phase failed

rem DO NOT PUT ANYTHING AFTER THE LAST LINE !!!!

rem (or job will be shown as Backup Completed, instead of BackupFailed

rem when it is no good)

cd %NV_HOME%\util

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED nvexitstatus 0

Page 294: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

282 Chapter 16Using Advanced Features

if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED nvexitstatus 1

A Trigger batch file script to trigger each new job using the NV_USER_ARG as thePost Script parameter and ‘net report’ job completion status to another machine.

@echo off

rem trigger.bat

rem Richard Benton 19990422

rem

rem @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@

rem @ Standard NT Triggered Job Batchfile @

rem @ Call with Advanced Option, Post Script @

rem @ to trigger the next job in daisy-chain @

rem @ Name: trigger.bat User Parameter: <trigger> @

rem @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@

rem

rem Notes:

rem 1. Batch File must reside in NetVault6\scripts directory

rem 2. If used for triggering remote jobs, script reside on bothmachines

rem 3. Should work wherever NetVault6 is installed

rem 4. Written for and tested on NT; with modifications, should workfor UNIX.

rem 5. Used successfully for daisy-chained job series.

rem 6. Uses Net remote info box reporting to indicate progress of jobs

rem 7. Must have NetVault6 services running on both machines

rem if triggering remotely.

rem 8. Set to end backup series submissions if any job fails (witherror).

rem

rem @@@ Standard Reporting (for all batch jobs) @@@

echo.

echo The home directory of NetVault (NV_HOME) = %NV_HOME%

echo.

echo The NetVault Job ID (NV_JOBID) = %NV_JOBID%

echo.

echo The user argument (NV_USER_ARG) = %NV_USER_ARG%

echo.

Page 295: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 283

echo Previous job phase status (NV_STATUS) = %NV_STATUS%

echo

rem @@@ Previous Job Reporting (for log) @@@

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo YES! - Job %NV_JOBID% succeeded!

if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED echo OH NO! - Job %NV_JOBID% FAILED!

rem @@@ Main Actions @@@

if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED goto bypass

rem @@@@ Edit next line for correct machine to Net report to @@@@

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID%Completed OK, Triggered Job %NV_USER_ARG% being called..."

rem The following cd command is necessary, as must be inNetVault6\util to run util commands.

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED cd %NV_HOME%\util

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo now in directory %NV_HOME%\util

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo (about to run nvtrigger job)

rem @@@@ Edit next 2 lines for correct NetVault Server name @@@@

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED nvtrigger -server bentonsvr %NV_USER_ARG%

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED echo "Command was nvtrigger -serverbentonsvr %NV_USER_ARG%"

goto end

rem @@@ Trigger Arguments Reference @@@

rem Example NetVault User Arguments to be used with this batchfile

rem (these are each used to backup a separate partition on RichardPC)

rem (T for Triggered, rich for Richard PC, X for drive letter, _Xxxfor label)

rem

rem TrichD_Apps

rem TrichE_Games

rem TrichF_Apps2

rem TrichG_Data

rem TrichH_Web

rem TrichI_Sue

Page 296: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

284 Chapter 16Using Advanced Features

rem TrichJ_Richard

rem TrichL_Download

rem

:bypass

echo (bypassing nvtrigger commands).

rem @@@@ Edit next line for correct machine to Net report to @@@@

if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED net send richard "Job %NV_JOBID% FAILED,ending series"

:end

echo End of Particular Batch File Actions

rem Return nonzero exit state if previous NetVault job phase failed

rem DO NOT PUT ANYTHING AFTER THE LAST LINE !!!!

rem (or job will be shown as Backup Completed, instead of BackupFailed

rem when it is no good)

cd %NV_HOME%\util

if %NV_STATUS% == SUCCEEDED nvexitstatus 0

if %NV_STATUS% == FAILED nvexitstatus 1

Example Script under UNIXA simple script to check the NetVault Environmental Variables and job exit status.

echo Check NetVault Environmental Variables Script

echo 'The home directory of NetVault (NV_HOME) = $NV_HOME

echo 'The NetVault Job ID (NV_JOBID) = $NV_JOBID

echo 'The user argument (NV_USER_ARG) = $NV_USER_ARG

echo 'Previous job phase succeeded (NV_STATUS) = $NV_STATUS

# Return nonzero exit state if previous phase failed

if [ "$NV_STATUS" = SUCCEEDED ]

then

Page 297: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 285

exit 0

else

exit 1

fi

Triggering Jobs using nvtriggerNetVault provides the ability to create backup or restore jobs which are only addedto the NetVault Server's schedule when they are triggered using the nvtrigger utilityin the NetVault6/util directory.

Triggered jobs are created using the Triggered option in the Schedule tab of eitherthe NetVault Backup or Restore windows. For more information on using theSchedule tab, see Scheduling Jobs (page 227).

You can run a triggered job on any NetVault Server listed with a blue (available)icon under the Available Servers in the NetVault Domain Management window. Inmost cases, this is the local NetVault Server, but can be any NetVault Server thatcan be seen under the GUI.

It is not necessary to have the NetVault GUI running to use the nvtrigger command,even if the job to be triggered is on another machine; however, it is necessary tohave the NetVault Process Manager service running. This service can be startedand stopped from the Service tab of the NetVault Configurator. For moreinformation, see Using the NetVault Configurator (page 31).

nvtrigger CommandsThe usage (or command syntax) for nvtrigger is:

nvtrigger [-server <servername>] <triggername>

where:

<triggername> is a string, which may be up to the maximum lengthallowed by your system, as entered in the Trigger name field of the Scheduletab on the NetVault Backup or Restore windows before the job was saved orsubmitted.

and optionally (for triggering a job on remote server only):

<servername> is the NetVault server name (as listed under AvailableServers), on which the job is to be triggered.

Page 298: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

286 Chapter 16Using Advanced Features

Triggered Backup Job (single word trigger name)The following example shows a single word trigger:

The above triggered backup job was created. Note the following points:

� The Trigger name entered (trigger_test1) is a single word; this enables thetrigger command to be entered without the use of double quotes (" ") which arerequired when a trigger name contains spaces.

� The Job Title for the backup contains the Trigger name. This makes it easy toidentify the correct trigger when looking at the list of jobs in the Jobs tab of theNetVault Jobs window.

� The Schedule Set has been saved for possible future use.

When the backup is either saved (or submitted) the job is ready to be scheduled. Itwill only be added to the backup schedule of the NetVault server (in this examplerichard) when the nvtrigger command is issued:

� Either for a job on the local NetVault server:

nvtrigger trigger_test1

or for a job on a remote NetVault server (called richard):

nvtrigger -server richard trigger_test1

� from a command prompt, script or batch file. If the command is accepted, youshould receive the response:

Page 299: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 287

Activating trigger trigger_test1

If you then see the response:

Failed to activate trigger

this probably means that you have made a typing error, there is a networkproblem, or that the NetVault services are not running on the NetVault Serverbeing triggered.

If you see the response:

Failed to communicate to NetVault services

this probably means that the NetVault services are not running on the localNetVault machine.

To create the triggered job on a remote NetVault server, you can either go to theremote NetVault machine and do it, or add the machine to your list of ControlledServers, by choosing the Administration Domain Management command andcreating the job on the remote machine using your local NetVault GUI.

Triggered Backup Job (multiple word trigger name)The following example shows a multiple word trigger:

Page 300: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

288 Chapter 16Using Advanced Features

The above triggered backup job was created. Note the following points:

� The Trigger name entered (trigger test 3) is three words, so it will benecessary to use double quotes (" ") around the name when using the nvtriggercommand.

� The Job Title for the backup contains the Trigger name enclosed in quotes.This makes it easy to identify the correct trigger when looking at the list of jobsin the Jobs tab of the NetVault Jobs window.

� The Schedule Set has been saved for possible future use.

When the backup is either saved (or submitted) the job is ready to be scheduled. Itwill only be added to the backup schedule of the NetVault server (in this exampletest_srv2) when the nvtrigger command is issued:

� Either for a job on the local NetVault Server:

nvtrigger "trigger test 3"

or for a job on a remote NetVault Server (called test_srv2):

nvtrigger -server test_srv2 "trigger test 3"

� from a command prompt, script or batch file. If the command is accepted, youshould receive the response:

Activating trigger trigger test 3

If you then see the response:

Failed to activate trigger

this probably means that you have made a typing error, there is a networkproblem, or that the NetVault services are not running on the NetVault Serverbeing triggered.

If you see the response:

Failed to communicate to NetVault services

this probably means that the NetVault services are not running on the localNetVault machine.

To create the triggered job on a remote NetVault server, you can either go to theremote NetVault machine and do it, or add the machine to your list of ControlledServers, by choosing the Administration>Domain Management command andcreating the job on the remote machine using your local NetVault GUI.

Working with Firewalls

NetVault provides the ability to identify ports through which data can be transferred across asecured network firewall. Simply enter a comma or dash-separated list of valid port ID’s in theValid Ports for Devices box on the Fire Wall tab of the NetVault Configurator. The portidentification must be configured on the machines with attached devices.

Page 301: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

APPENDIX A

Performance TuningWhat is Performance Tuning? - 291

Optimizing Drive Performance - 291

Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box - 292

� From a Selected Drive - 292� From the Device Management Window - 292� From the Library Configure Tab - 293

Using the Edit Drive Window - 294

� Relationship between Block Size and Shared Memory Size - 297

Gathering Statistics - 297

� Viewing the Statistics - 298

Understanding How the Data Stream is Handled - 302

Page 302: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 303: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 291

What is Performance Tuning?

NetVault is a high performance backup solution. After installation and the addition ofdevices, the majority of default configuration settings are automatically optimized, butsettings can be manually changed to improve performance.

Driver performance is optimized through the Edit Drive dialog box as shown:

Optimizing Drive Performance

Each Drive controlled by a NetVault server can be optimized individually, so if desired,different settings can be used for each drive in a library.

Drive configuration can be optimized as the drive is being added (either as a Simple Driveor as part of a Library), or it can be optimized at a later time by choosing theAdministration Device Management command. For general information, see Device andLibrary Management (page 59). Configuration aspects are detailed in this section.

Page 304: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

292 Appendix APerformance Tuning

Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box

To optimize the drive performance, open the Edit Drive dialog box after opening the DeviceManagement window using one of the following methods:

From a Selected Drive1. Navigate to and select the desired drive in the Devices tab of the Device

Management window.

2. Right-click and choose Configure from the pop-up menu as shown in thefollowing figure:

From the Device Management Window1. Right-click and choose Add Standalone Drive.

Page 305: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 293

The Add Standalone Drive window opens, as shown in the following figure:

2. Navigate to and select the desired drive in the Choose Drives list.

3. Right-click and choose Configure from the pop-up menu

From the Library Configure Tab1. Select the desired library, right-click and choose Modify from the pop-up menu,

as shown in the following figure:

NOTE: This method can only be used at the time a device is being added.

Page 306: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

294 Appendix APerformance Tuning

The Modify Library window opens.

2. Click the Configure tab.

3. Navigate to and select the desired drive.

4. Right-click and choose Configure.

Using the Edit Drive Window

When you first open the Edit Drive window, the Configuration tab is displayed.

NOTE: This method may be used while the library is being added.

WARNING: Do not change the default settings in the Configuration tabexcept under the guidance of NetVault Technical Support (page 6).

Page 307: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 295

The Configuration tab default settings are shown in the following figure:

1. Click the Performance tab. The default settings on this tab are shown in thefollowing figure:

The field Amount of memory to assign to transfer buffers (Kb) is what isoften referred to a the shared memory setting. The shared memory is normallyallocated in 32Kb blocks represented in the following figure, showing how it isshared between the two transfer functions.

Page 308: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

296 Appendix APerformance Tuning

The default setting of 257Kb is actually 8 buffers of 32Kb (plus a byte). If youravailable memory allows, NetVault Limited recommends increasing this settingto optimize performance. It is also best to leave the Lock transfer buffer inmemory check box cleared.

Under Microsoft Windows NT, it is recommend that you change the setting to8193Kb; under certain UNIX operating systems, the kernel memory availablemay be more restricted.

2. Increase the Amount of memory to assign to transfer buffers (Kb) to a moreoptimal value, as discussed.

3. Click the Statistics tab.

The two check boxes on this tab allow performance statistics to be gathered andlogged. Unless you need to gather statistics, leave both check boxes cleared.See Gathering Statistics (page 297).

4. Click the OK button.

Device

ManagerTape

DrivePlugin

NetVaultHard

Disk

32K

32K

32K

32K

32K. . .

. . .

. . .

Shared Memory

Page 309: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 297

Relationship between Block Size and Shared Memory SizeThe default values for block size and shared memory size are:

Block Size 32 KB

Share Memory Size 257 KB

This relationship is based on the formula:

(Block Size x 4) + 1 = Minimum Shared Memory Size

This configuration is set up for each tape drive. If you don’t satisfy this requirement,you may encounter problems with your system.

For example,

If you’d like to increase the block size (e.g. from 32 KB to 96 KB), you must increasethe shared memory size.

� Bad Configuration

96 KB (Block Size) with 384 KB or less of shared memory

� Good Configuration

96 KB (Block Size) with 385 KB or more of shared memory.

Gathering Statistics

NetVault provides the ability to gather statistics for each drive via the Statistics tab inthe Edit Drive window.

To gather statistics for a drive:

1. Open the Edit Drive window for the drive to be monitored using the instructionsin Opening the Edit Drive Dialog Box (page 292).

2. Click the Statistics tab.

NOTE: Configuring total shared memory size also depends on youroperating system. Always use caution when setting block size and sharedmemory size on your system.

Page 310: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

298 Appendix APerformance Tuning

3. Select both check boxes and click the OK button.

The statistics gathered are represented by the following figure:

Viewing the StatisticsWhen either of the Gather Statistics options is selected and a NetVault backup isrun, you can view the statistics by following these steps:

Device TapePlugin

NetVault data channel

Device transfer statistics

Data channel statistics

- Plugin data transfer statistics (Device side)

- Data channel send statistics

Page 311: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 299

1. Choose the Operations Logs command to open the NetVault Logs window,shown in the following figure:

2. Click the Filter Options button on the window or choose the View Set Filterscommand to open the Filter Options dialog box.

3. Select the Warning Level - All option button and the extended logging will beshown as Background log items.

Contact Technical Support (page 6) if you need help interpreting your statistics.

The following example shows the statistics entries as Background, with greenexclamation mark icons. Double-click an extended log icon to see theinformation gathered.

Page 312: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

300 Appendix APerformance Tuning

The Data channel statistics(Device side) show that thedevice was only blocked fromreceiving data from the datachannel 5 times, for a totaltime of just over 1 second.

The Device transferstatistics show that thetransfer was blocked on thedevice 8+2232+11+2+91times (i.e.2344 times), for atotal time of about 2 1/2minutes).

This shows that the device isthe ‘bottle neck’ in the chain.

Page 313: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 301

The Data channel sendstatistics show that theNetVault plugin was blockedfrom sending data to the datachannel 1931 times, for a totaltime of nearly 2 1/4 minutes.

The Transfer Informationshows that the transfer took 2mins 35 secs at a transfer rateof 483.10 Kbytes/sec.

Page 314: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

302 Appendix APerformance Tuning

Understanding How the Data Stream is Handled

When you use the Data Plugin (e.g. UNIX FS Plugin), it retrieves the data from disk,then streams it into shared memory buffers. The Data Plugin requests a sharedmemory buffer to send the data which it has received from disk. Once a sharedmemory buffer is assigned, the data is transferred and the data plugin gets moredata from the disk, then requests another shared memory buffer, and so on.

Next, data is transferred from Shared Memory to the Device Manager. This is aprocess level transfer of data so you would not expect blocking here. Once the datatransfer is complete, the Device Manager transfers the data to the tape drive via theSCSI interface.

The tape drive uses its own memory buffers. It is important to have the data beingtransferred at this point as fast as possible to keep the tape device streaming andtherefore get optimum performance.

The Data channel statistics and the Device transfer statistics dialog boxes show thedata transfer statistics between the Shared Memory and the Device Manager."Times requested buffer" shows the number of times the Device Manager requesteddata from the Shared Memory buffers. In the example you can see that it requestedbuffers 2350 times and was blocked 5 of those times. In other words, the data wasonly delayed being transferred to the drive 5 out of 2350 times. The total time takenby the blocks was 1151 milli-seconds.

You can see that 2344 blocks of data were transferred and the total time waiting forthe tape device (Blocked on device) was 154762 milliseconds (or around 2.5minutes). This could indicate that the tape drive is at optimum performance but is notable to transfer to tape quickly enough to keep up with the stream of data.

The Data channel statistics and the Transfer dialog boxes show the send statisticsand transfer information. This represents the data transfer between the Data Pluginand the Shared Memory. In the example you can see that the majority of the bufferrequests were blocked. This indicates that the data from the plugin could not getshared memory buffers frequently. This would indicate that the shared memorybuffers are too small. The data is coming off the disk at a good rate, but the SharedMemory is not being emptied quickly enough by the Device Manager. This eithermeans that the shared memory buffer sizes are too small or the tape device/SCSIbus does not meet design specifications. If you see that the tape drive is havingtrouble keeping up with the data stream, you can assume that this is why there areso many blocks.

Page 315: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

APPENDIX B

TroubleshootingGetting Help - 305

Dumping Log Files - 305

Producing Trace Files - 306

Running the NetVault Configurator - 306

� NetVault for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0 - 306� NetVault for UNIX - 306

Help with Common Problems - 307

� Waiting for Media - 307� Checking Media Request, Media Status and Job Log - 307� Block Sizes and Shared Memory Configuration - 308� Tips on Backing Up Sybase - 308� Using CPIO to Retrieve Files from a NetVault Tape - 309� Informix Configurations - 311� Missing Icons in the NetVault GUI - 311� Multiple Network Interface Cards (NIC) and communication problems - 311� Overheads in writing to tape - 312� Oracle backup fails with "Can't open XXXX" message - 312� Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients - 313� Why does NetVault not allow you to backup the proc directory? - 314

Page 316: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 317: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 305

Getting Help

BakBone Technical Support can provide you with the assistance you need if you are havingproblems with your NetVault software. For details, please refer to our web site:

http://www.bakbone.com

Technical Support may need copies of your (binary) log files and special debugging tracefiles to get the information they need to help you. This appendix contains instructions on howto get that information.

Dumping Log Files

The binary format file can be reloaded into a NetVault Logs window and re-examined at alater date (enabling all the filtering functions to be used); it can then be used by BakBoneTechnical Support should there be a problem that needs investigating. Binary log dumps arealways the preferred format.

Refer to Using Logs (page 249) for information on the NetVault Log window facilities.

To dump binary log files, follow these steps:

1. From the NetVault GUI, click the Logs button to open the NetVault Log window.

2. Click the Filter Options button to open the Filter Options dialog box.

3. Set the Warning Level to All.

This is important since only the content of the dump is moderated by any logfiltering applied (i.e. the dump is the same as can be viewed in the NetVaultLogs window). In general it is best to dump all of the contents - filtering canalways be used to view only part of a log re-loaded into the window.

4. Click the Dump Log Information to File button or choose Options Dump Logto File to open the Dump Log Entries to File dialog box, with Binary Formatselected as the default.

5. Enter a suitable filename (without an extension) in the Dump Log File Namebox and click OK.

Page 318: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

306 Appendix BTroubleshooting

A NetVault - Information dialog box should confirm that the log dump has beenwritten correctly:

6. Click the OK button to acknowledge it.

The log should have been written in the NetVault6/logs/dumps/binary (orNetVault6\logs\dumps\binary) directory, with the specified filename.

Producing Trace Files

Debugging (producing trace files) should only be turned on under the direction of BakBoneTechnical Support. If you are requested to produce trace files, you need to:

� Open the NetVault Configurator and turn debugging ON. See Turning on debugging(page 37).

� Repeat the activity that was causing problems, so that full debugging trace files for it areproduced.

� Open the NetVault Configurator and turn debugging OFF. See Turning off debugging(page 37).

� Upload the trace files to the BakBone ftp site.

To reduce transfer time, we recommend that the complete trace sub-directory be zipped(or compressed) before being uploaded to the NetVault Limited ftp site (currently ftpwww.bakbone.com). We do not recommend that you send the trace files by e-mail, asthey could overload Internet e-mail systems and fail to arrive. Contact Technical Support(page 6) for more information.

Running the NetVault Configurator

To run the NetVault Configurator:

NetVault for Microsoft Windows NT 4.0Choose Start>Programs>NetVault >NetVault Configurator.

NetVault for UNIXChange to the NetVault6/bin directory and issue the command:./nvconfigurator

Page 319: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 307

Help with Common Problems

Some of the most common problems you may encounter are explained in this section.

Waiting for MediaWhen a NetVault Job is running, it is normal for NetVault to have to wait for a periodfor the media to be made ready for writing or reading. During this period, the Statusof the job in the Status tab of the NetVault Jobs window is shown as Waiting forMedia.

Under certain circumstances the job will remain in this condition, requiring operatorintervention to resolve the problem. There are a number reasons why this mightoccur, including:

� A backup job has been targeted to a particular device and/or item of mediaand either the device or media are offline, or otherwise unavailable. This iswhen the job is using option on the Target tab of the NetVault Backup window.

� A required media for a restore job is currently offline.

� There is no suitable device/media combination available to continue with thejob. This may happen if you do not have media with sufficient space availableto complete the backup. For example, the first part of the job may run and fillup a tape in a library, but there is no suitable tape to continue the next phaseof the backup.

� You have submitted a backup with the default Target Media option of Any notin a group, but all available tapes are allocated to groups so they will not beused (even if they contain no backups).

� A problem has occurred with the device or media which become defective, asyou are using them. Note that if media is found to be defective, it is normallymarked Bad by NetVault and the media is not used for a backup.

Checking Media Request, Media Status and Job LogThe easiest way to see what is wrong is to view the Media Request informationprovided in the Device Management window. For more information, see The MediaRequests Tab (page 72).

If you think that the media in the drive may have a problem, select the drive, right-click and choose Media Status to check its condition.

You can also select the job in the Status area of the NetVault Jobs window, right-click and choose View Log to see any error or warning messages. For moreinformation, see Job Management (page 239).

Page 320: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

308 Appendix BTroubleshooting

Block Sizes and Shared Memory ConfigurationNetVault is configured to use 32k blocks of data and 257k of shared memory perdrive. If you think of shared memory as many small buckets of memory where blocksof data are stored, then it follows that by using a 32k block size many blocks of datacan be stored in 257k of shared memory.

If the block size is increased to 128k, but the shared memory remains the same, thenthe largest number of blocks that can be stored in the shared memory is two, withvery little space remaining.

This limitation impacts performance, since you are no longer using memory forbuffering data.

As a rough guide to configuration of shared memory and block size's, use thefollowing calculation to estimate the minimum amount of shared memory per drive:

Block Size X 4 = Shared memory size.

If your block size is set to 32k, then use this calculation:

32 X 4 = 128k which sets up the drives to use 128k shared memory.

If your block size is 128k, then use this calculation.

128 X 4 = 512k which sets up the shared memory to use 512k shared memory.

Remember that this calculation is the absolute minimum you would want to use. It isalways better to add at least a few k on to of these amounts, so 128k would become130k and 512k would become 520k

Tips on Backing Up SybaseThe following information is valuable to prevent problems in backing up Sybase:

1. Install the Sybase plugin via the Client Management window, there will be aninstall software method off the pop-up menu from the selected client.

2. Copy the libsybhook.so file from the NetVault lib directory to the Sybase libdirectory.

3. In the /etc/rc2.d/S99NetVault6 file add the lines before NetVault is startedSYBASE=<path to sybase XI>

export SYBASE

e.g.

'start')

findnv6home

SYBASE=<path to sybase XI>

export SYBASE

$NVHOME/bin/nvpmgr

Page 321: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 309

exit 0

4. In the NetVault configurator (nvconfigurator) go to the Plugin Options tab, thenthe Sybase options tab. Ensure the path to Sybase is correct, the default is /opt/sybase/XI.

Using CPIO to Retrieve Files from a NetVault TapeTo retrieve files from a NetVault tape using CPIO (not NetVault), follow these steps:

1. Rewind the tape.

Check in NetVault for the name of the device driver of the tape device you wantto use. The device driver MUST be a non-rewinding device.

IMPORTANT: Make sure you do NOT have NetVault, or any other process thatuses the tape drive, running while you perform the commands; mt will failbecause NetVault locks the device.

Enter the following command:

mt -f <device_name> rewind

e.g. mt -f /dev/rmt/c1t0d0s0nn rewind

When this is complete, move the tape to the correct position.

2. Position the tape at the correct point on the tape.

To correctly position the tape, you need to understand how NetVault hasstructured a CPIO tape, shown in the following figure:

Note: The lines between the files are filemarks on the tape.

If you want to CPIO the first backup job from the tape then you will need toposition the tape past the NetVault Header to the first filemark that denotes thebeginning of the first backup job, using these steps:

Issue the following command:

mt -f <device_name> fsf X

where X denotes the number of file marks you want to move to.

e.g., to move to the start of Backup Job 2, the command would be

mt -f <device_name> fsf 3

Important: Only use NON-REWINDING device drivers. If you use a rewindingdevice driver, after each time the tape is repositioned it will rewind. No matter

NetVaultHeader

BackupJob 1

Index BackupJob 2

Index BackupJob 3

Page 322: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

310 Appendix BTroubleshooting

how many file marks you move you will always end up at the beginning of thetape.

3. Use CPIO to un-archive the files onto your hard disk.

Issue the following command to un-archive the data from the tape onto your harddisk into the original directory the files were backed up from:

cpio -icvdumB <device_name>

For example, if the files were backup up from /home/elliott, then the files will berestored to /home/elliott even if you ran CPIO from /usr.

Make sure you have enough disk space to complete this activity. If you want toview the archive before you un-archive onto your hard disk, issue the followingcommand:

cpio -tab <device_name>

This will list the archive as if you listed a directory contents with the ls -Icommand.

To move the archive from tape onto your hard disk before un-archiving, issue thefollowing command:

dd if=<device_name> of=/<location to place file/name of thefile> bs=xxk

where xxk is the device block size.

e.g., dd if=/dev/rmt/c120t5d0s0nn of=/home/elliott/file.cpio bs=32k

If you check the directory into which the file was copied.

Now you need to un-archive the file by issuing the following command:

cpio -icvdumB </location of cpio file>

e.g., cpio -icvdumB </home/elliott/file.cpio

Again, this will un-archive the files into their original directory. There is nofunction within CPIO that allows files to be redirected into an alternate directory.

FOR SUN SOLARIS ONLY

The command shown below will not work on Sun Solaris machines:

cpio -icvdumB <device_name>

To cpio directly from tape, use the following command:

dd if=<non rewinding tape> bs=xxk | cpio -icvdumB

where xx is the block size of the device.

Page 323: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 311

Informix ConfigurationsIn the Informix onconfig file, there are 2 settings that may cause problems if notcorrectly configured:

TAPEDEV /dev/null # Tape device path

LTAPEDEV /dev/null # Log tape device path

If these are set to /dev/null then this could cause Informix problems. Change the/dev/null to NetVault, and this problem is resolved.

Missing Icons in the NetVault GUIIf, when browsing a client, there are missing icons, you may need to refresh thecached pits, using these steps:

1. Stop the GUI on both the server and the client.

2. Navigate to the /nv6/gui/cachedpits directory.

3. Remove the directory that has the same name as the client with the missingicons.

4. Move into the /cachedpits/icons directory

5. Remove ALL icons.

6. Restart the GUI on the client.

7. Browse the client, and all icons will be copied from the server to the client. Thismay take a few seconds.

Multiple Network Interface Cards (NIC) and communicationproblemsNetVault6 allows you to define which NIC you want NetVault6 to use. This can beuseful if you are having problems with communications between a NetVault6 serverand a NetVault6 client.

To specify which NIC you want to use, follow these steps:

1. Start the NetVault configurator on the machine with the multiple NIC's and clickthe Network Manager tab.

2. To specify a NIC, enter the IP address the NIC is using into the preferrednetwork address and NetVault will only use that NIC to broadcast on.

If there are NIC's that are may be connected to the internet or to parts of thenetwork you do not want NetVault to broadcast on, then enter the IP addressesof the NIC's you want to bar.

If there are multiple addressees, then enter the addresses separated by acomma (,) for example, 192.168.1.1,192.168.1.2

Page 324: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

312 Appendix BTroubleshooting

In a environment that has more than 2 networks, this can be used to prefer somenetworks over others, as described in the following example:

A site has 3 networks:

Network A is the working network.

Network B is a the backup network

Network C is a private network that should not be used for backups at all.

Most machines are connected to network A, but some are only connected to NetworkB. No machines are only connected to network C. A few machines are connected toboth network A & B

In this case, we can set up Network B as the preferred network, and network C as abarred network.

This will have the following effect:

Machines that are connected to both A & B will use B.

Machines that are connected to A only will be able to backup as network A isnot barred.

Machines that are connected to B will only backup over network B, completelyignoring network A.

This means that only machines that have to be backed up over Network A will, allother machines if possible will backup over Network B. This reduces traffic on theworking network, and ensures that you will get the best usage out of your backupnetwork.

Overheads in writing to tapeWhen backing up to tape, there is an overhead that makes the backup appear tobackup a larger amount of data than is reported by the OS.

The overheads for writing to tape are:

� CPIO (Unix) 110 byte overhead per file

� MTF (Windows NT) Minimum of 2K overhead per file

Data stored on tape will ALWAYS be bigger than that on disk. This is because thereis an overhead with tape formats for storing data.

This means that if you are doing lots of small files - less that 1k, your backups willeasily be twice as big. If you have 1000 empty files they will actually require 2Mb oftape space when using MTF.

Oracle backup fails with "Can't open XXXX" messageIf an Oracle backup fails with an error Can't open XXX file or directory, it mayindicate a permissions problem.

Page 325: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 313

The following directories both need read/write access rights to both the netvault/rootuser and the to oracle user:

/netvault6/config

/netvault6/tmp

During the backup, NetVault SU's from root to oracle user. Problems can occur ifthe oracle user cannot write into either of the above directories.

Usually the process manager on a restart will set the correct write accesses to boththe netvault and oracle user, but there have been times when this does not workunder certain circumstances.

The resolution in this case is to chmod the above directories to 777. This will allowALL users read and write access.

Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVaultservers and clientsIf you find you can see network clients, but are getting error messages relating tonot being able to communicate with them, you must:

1. Establish whether you actually have a link between the 2 machines by pingingeach way (from client to server and from server to client).

Always use network names. If the ping fails with the network name, but workswith an IP address, then almost certainly you have not setup either DNS orhosts. Either can be responsible for name resolution.

2. Running nslookup can also help in trying to understand why you are unable toconnect to a machine. Running nslookup on a machine will not only show thenetwork name and IP address of the machine you specified, but it will also tellyou the DNS server that the machine is resolving against. Use the followingcommands to determine whether DNS is correctly configured;

From the NetVault server:

nslookup <clients network name including domain name>

-> Make sure the correct IP is returned

nslookup <clients IP address>

-> Make sure the correct fully qualified domain name is returned

From the NetVault Client:

nslookup <servers network name including domain name>

-> Make sure the correct IP is returned

nslookup <servers IP address>

-> Make sure the correct fully qualified domain name is returned

Page 326: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

314 Appendix BTroubleshooting

Once you have ascertained that you are able to ping with the network name,check to see if you can communicate with the client.

3. If the reverse DNS is incorrect (i.e., nslookup <ip address> is returning nothing orthe wrong name), then add the server and clients name and IP address to thehosts files on both the server and client. Most machines are set up to try nameresolution from hosts files first, then DNS. If this is the case, adding names andIPs into the hosts file should override the DNS problem. However, this is not apermanent fix and efforts to resolve the DNS problems should be made. This isparticularly so if you are using DHCP.

This will achieve 2 things.

� First, it will allow you to be able to back up your client.

� Second, it will prove that there is a problem with the name resolving of yourDNS server.

You will find the hosts file is the following places:

Windows NT: C:\winnt\system32\drivers\etc\hosts

Unix: /etc/hosts

The layout of the hosts file is:

<IP Address><space or tab><Name>

for example: 192.168.1.23 elliott

You can also have multiple network names (or aliases) in hosts. These will beseparated by a space.

Why does NetVault not allow you to backup the proc directory?The /proc directory is a dynamic structure created so that the operating systemmemory space can be accessed through the filesystem. It is almost completely readonly and restoring it cannot be done. It is not the original image for the kernel on diskbut the memory version of it.

Page 327: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

APPENDIX C

Using Regular ExpressionsWhat is a Regular Expression? - 317

Where are Regular Expressions Used? - 317

Using Regular Expressions - 317

Page 328: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 329: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 317

What is a Regular Expression?

A regular expression is a shorthand for abbreviating patterns of text.

Where are Regular Expressions Used?

Regular expressions can be used in the Restore Search dialog box when looking for specificbackup savesets in the Selections frame of the NetVault Restore window.

To open the Restore Search dialog box, select a backup saveset (or any data elementsbelow it), right-click and choose Search from the pop-up menu. The Restore Search dialogbox appears as shown in the following figure:

Select the Regular Expression Search check box to search for all backups satisfying theregular expression pattern entered as a Search String.

The use of these expressions is beyond the scope of this manual but this Appendix providessome information from a Public Domain source which may be of use.

Using Regular Expressions

The following is adapted from the manual for GNU grep (a general regular expressionparser), the data extractor search engine uses egrep to perform free-text searches.

A regular expression is a pattern that describes a set of strings. Regular expressions areconstructed analogously to arithmetic expressions, by using various operators to combinesmaller expressions

Grep understands two different versions of regular expression syntax: `basic' and`extended.' In GNU grep, there is no difference in available functionality using either syntax.In other implementations, basic regular expressions are less powerful. The followingdescription applies to extended regular expressions; differences for basic regularexpressions are summarized afterwards.

The fundamental building blocks are the regular expressions that match a single character.Most characters, including all letters and digits, are regular expressions that match

NOTE: BakBone Software assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of thisinformation.

Page 330: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

318 Appendix CUsing Regular Expressions

themselves. Digits, are regular expressions that match themselves. Any meta-character withspecial meaning may be quoted by preceding it with a backslash.

A list of characters enclosed by [ and ] matches any single character in that list; if the firstcharacter of the list is the caret ^ then it matches any character not in the list.

For example, the regular expression [0123456789] matches any single digit.

A range of ASCII characters may be specified by giving the first and last characters,separated by a hyphen. The above expression can therefore be concisely expressed as [0-9].

Finally, certain named classes of characters are predefined. Their names are selfexplanatory, and they are [:alnum:], [:alpha:], [:cntrl:], [:digit:], [:graph:], [:lower:], [:print:],[:punct:], [:space:], [:upper:], and [:xdigit:]. For example, [[:alnum:]] means [0-9A-Za-z],except the latter form is dependent upon the ASCII character encoding, whereas the formeris portable. (Note that the brackets in these class names are part of the symbolic names, andmust be included in addition to the brackets delimiting the bracket list.) Most metacharacterslose their special meaning inside lists. To include a literal ] place it first in the list. Similarly, toinclude a literal ^ place it anywhere but first. Finally, to include a literal - place it last.

The period . matches any single character. The symbol \w is a synonym for [[:alnum:]] and \Wis a synonym for [^[:alnum]].

The caret ^ and the dollar sign $ are metacharacters that respectively match the empty stringat the beginning and end of a line. The symbols \< and \> respectively match the empty stringat the beginning and end of a word. The symbol \b matches the empty string at the edge of aword, and \B matches the empty string provided it's not at the edge of a word.

A regular expression matching a single character may be followed by one of severalrepetition operators:

? The preceding item is optional and matched at most once.

* The preceding item will be matched zero or more times.

+ The preceding item will be matched one or more times.

{n} The preceding item is matched exactly n times.

{n,} The preceding item is matched n or more times.

{,m} The preceding item is optional and is matched at most m times.

{n,m} The preceding item is matched at least n times, but not more than m times.

Two regular expressions may be concatenated; the resulting regular expression matches anystring formed by concatenating two substrings that respectively match the concatenatedsubexpressions.

Two regular expressions may be joined by the infix operator |; the resulting regularexpression matches any string matching either subexpression.

Repetition takes precedence over concatenation, which in turn takes precedence overalternation. A whole subexpression may be enclosed in parentheses to override theseprecedence rules.

Page 331: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 319

The backreference \n, where n is a single digit, matches the substring previously matchedby the nth parenthesized subexpression of the regular expression.

In basic regular expressions the metacharacters ?, +, {, |, (, and ) lose their special meaning;instead use the backslashed versions \?, \+, \{, \|, \(, and \).

In egrep the metacharacter { loses its special meaning; instead use \{.

Page 332: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 333: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

APPENDIX D

Hardware and Software SupportPlatform and Operating System Support - 323

Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver - 323

� Installation from Image File - 323� Copying the Software from the CD-ROM - 324� Installing the Software from Image - 324� Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver - 325� Post-Installation - 327� Specifying Media Changer to RS6000 - 327� NetVault Utilities - 327

Page 334: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 335: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 323

Platform and Operating System Support

2 File System backup and restore using Office Data Share plugin

Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI Driver

Installation from Image FileTo install the software you must:

� Copy the NetVault SCSI driver software from the distribution media to thecomputer.

NetVault Platform/OS Support

NetVault Servers NetVault Clients

Windows NT (Intel) Windows NT (Intel)

NCR (MP-RAS r03) NCR (MP-RAS r03)

SUN Solaris (SunSparc) SUN Solaris (SunSparc)

SUN Solaris (Intel) SUN Solaris (Intel)

Irix (Silicon Graphics) Irix (Silicon Graphics)

Digital UNIX (Alpha) Digital UNIX (Alpha)

Linux Linux

HP-UX (HP9000/700) HP-UX (HP9000/700)

AIX (IBM RS/6000) AIX (IBM RS/6000)

Windows 95/982

Windows 3.1x2

OS/2 (IBM)2

Novell NetWare 3 & 42

NOTE: For the most up-to-date information on platform and operating systemssupported by NetVault, go to the web site at www.netvault.co.uk.

Page 336: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

324 Appendix DHardware and Software Support

� Run an interactive program that automates the installation procedure.

Copying the Software from the CD-ROMYou first of all copy the NetVault SCSI driver installation software from theDistribution CD-ROM to your NetVault Server as follows:

1. Log on to the computer as root.

2. Insert the distribution CD-ROM into a drive on the computer, or one shared onthe network.

3. Using your standard binary file copy/transfer procedures, copy the image filefrom the root of the CD-ROM, to the /tmp directory on the computer.

You should ensure that the filename image is in lower case once transferred.

Installing the Software from ImageYou install the NetVault SCSI Drivers as follows:

1. Log on to the computer as root.

2. Run the IBM smit utility, and select the following options from the menuspresented:

• Software Installation and Maintenance

• Install and Update Software

• Install/Update Selectable Software (Custom Install)

• Install/Update From All Available Software

The Install/Update From All Available Software window is displayed:

3. Enter the INPUT device /directory for software, i.e. manually type in the path:

/tmp/image

4. Click OK.

Page 337: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 325

Installing the IBM RS NetVault SCSI DriverThe window changes as shown in the following figure:

]

5. Click List alongside the SOFTWARE to install line.The Multi-select List window is displayed:

Page 338: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

326 Appendix DHardware and Software Support

6. Select the NetVault Scsi Media Changer Driver and click OK (twice) on thisscreen and the previous screen.

You will be asked “Are you sure?.”

7. Click OK.The Netvault SCSI drivers will now install. Please wait. At the end of the installationthe Install/Update From All Available Software window will show the installationoutput:

Page 339: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 327

The key part of the window show read:

8. Choose Done.

Your NetVault SCSI driver software is now installed in the /usr/lpp/netvaultdirectory.

9. Exit smit and continue with the Post Installation procedure.

Post-InstallationAfter installing the software, it is necessary to configure the media changer of anattached library onto your system:

Specifying Media Changer to RS6000To specify a Media Changer to the system you enter the following command:

/usr/lpp/netvault/addchm

This automatically configures the media changer on the system, e.g.

Scanning SCSI busses for unknown chm devices

Found "OVERLAND" "LXB" on scsi1 at Connection Address [3,0]

Adding LXB as a generic CHM device

mkdev -c chm -s scsi -t generic -p scsi1 -w 3,0

wa0 Available

The device in the example was added as /dev/wa0.

NetVault Utilities

The /usr/lpp/netvault directory contains a number of files which should not bemanually removed. The two executables which you may run are:

/usr/lpp/netvault/addchm

This automatically configures the media changer on the system (see previousheading) and

/usr/lpp/netvault/remove_chm_devices

Page 340: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

328 Appendix DHardware and Software Support

Use this to remove wa devices before uninstalling the NetVault SCSI drivers usingsmit.

Page 341: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

APPENDIX E

Creating Virtual LibrariesCreating Virtual Libraries - 331

� Getting Set Up to Create a Virtual Library - 331� Generating Disk Devices - 332

Page 342: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 343: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 331

Creating Virtual Libraries

In order to place backed up data on a hard drive, you must configure NetVault with adirectory structure incorporating files that represent the media to be created. The AutomaticDisk Device Generator makes creating virtual libraries a simple process.

You may want to set up this type of configuration for evaluation, disk staging or just backingup to a hard disk.

Getting Set Up to Create a Virtual LibraryYour NetVault installation CD includes a package that allows you to automaticallygenerate disk devices in a virtual library. To install the package on your machine:

1. Open the Client Management window by clicking the Client Managementbutton on the toolbar or by choosing the Administration Client Managementcommand.

2. Right -click the desired client and choose Install Software, as shown in thefollowing figure:

3. Navigate to the directory where your NetVault software was installed and findthe packages/extra-npks/ddv110g.npk file.

Page 344: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

332 Appendix ECreating Virtual Libraries

4. Double-click the file. The software is loaded and the following message appears:

5. Click OK to exit the dialog box.

Now you are ready to generate your disk devices.

Generating Disk DevicesFollow these steps to generate disk devices on your hard drive:

1. Open the Device Management window by clicking the Device Managementbutton on the command toolbar or by choosing the Administration DeviceManagement command.

2. Right-click the desired device and choose Add Library to open the Add Librarywindow, shown in the following example:

Page 345: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 333

3. Right-click the client in the Choose Library area and choose Create PseudoLibrary to open the Add new pseudo library dialog box, shown in the followingfigure:

4. Enter the following information:

� Library location: The path to the location of the library.

� Library name: The name of the library you want to create.

� Barcode prefix: The prefix for the barcodes you want to assign. NetVaultgenerates a random code to help maintain the uniqueness of bar codes.

� Number of drives: Select the number of drives you want to create.

� Number of slots: Assign the number of slots in the library.

� Media capacity (MB): The size of the media in each slot.

5. Click OK to start building the library.

When the library has been created a confirming message appears, as shown inthe following figure:

6. Click OK to close the dialog.

Now you can add the library to the client by following the normal steps used toadd libraries. See Adding Libraries (page 81) for instructions.

NOTE: The media capacity you choose in the Add new pseudo library dialogbox is the size of each slot in the library. Make sure your available diskspace can accommodate these requirements.

Page 346: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

334 Appendix ECreating Virtual Libraries

To see that the devices you just added are available for use, open the DeviceManagement window, as shown in the following example:

Page 347: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

APPENDIX F

Using the NetVault ConfiguratorUsing the NetVault Configurator - 337

� Machine Tab - 337� License Tab - 338� Service Tab - 339� Packages Tab - 340� General Tab - 341� Fire Wall Tab - 344� GUI Tab - 345� Logging Daemon Tab - 349� Media Manager Tab - 351� Network Manager Tab - 352� Schedule Manager Tab - 355� Security Tab - 357

Page 348: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 349: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 337

Using the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator is a configuration tool included as part of the standard NetVaultinstallation, even if the NetVault GUI (Graphical User Interface) is not installed. There is noonline help system for the Configurator.

Normally, the Configurator is used to start and stop NetVault services which does notrequire assistance from Technical Support. However, it is recommended that other optionsbe changed only with the guidance of BakBone Technical Support (page 6).

This appendix explains all the options in the NetVault Configurator.

Machine TabThe Machine tab details information about the machine NetVault is installed on,including the Machine ID required to get a permanent License Key after productpurchase.

The NetVault Configurator’s Machine tab is shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Machine Tab includes:

� NetVault Machine Name: The name given to the NetVault server or clientduring installation, used to reference the NetVault machine while usingNetVault. This name does not have to be the same as the host name, it can bedifferent. Note that in naming a NetVault machine you cannot use specialcharacters, punctuation characters, spaces or capital letters. For instance,

Page 350: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

338 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

server, server1 and servernumber1 are acceptable, whereas server/1, server-1, server1! or “server1” are not.

� Machine ID: The unique machine identification generated by NetVault, in mostcases from the host name of the machine. License keys are generated from themachine ID and are tied to it. If the machine ID is changed, a new license keymust be made.

� Network Name(s): The host name of the NetVault server. Machines can havemore than one network name also known as Aliases.

� IP Address(es): The IP address of the computer. If multiple addresses arepresent all are displayed here whether they are on the same nic or on multiplenics. This is independent of any settings in the preferred/barred configuration.

� NetVault Version: The version number of the NetVault installation.

� O.S. Version: The version of the Operating System running on this computer.

� NetVault Platform: The platform under which NetVault is operating.

License TabThe License tab details the Server Capabilities and the Serial Numbers of AppliedKeys for the machine on which NetVault is installed. This information is the same asthat available in the Server Properties dialog box of NetVault’s DomainManagement window.

The NetVault Configurator License tab is shown in the following figure:

Page 351: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 339

Information available in the License tab includes:

� Server Capabilities: Lists the maximum Number of different servercapabilities. Information displayed depends on the license installed. During anevaluation period all capabilities are enabled. With a permanent key installedonly the purchased features are enabled and displayed here.

� Serial Numbers of Applied Keys: The serial numbers installed on thiscomputer. This is a list of ALL keys applied to this server/client. Keys appliedto other machines are not displayed here.

Service TabThe Service tab allows you to start and stop NetVault service. After installation, orafter a system re-boot, the NetVault Process Manager is automatically started.When upgrading to the most current NetVault release, you must start the servicemanually. The Current State of NetVault is displayed in the Service tab.

When necessary, you can Start NetVault and Stop NetVault by clicking theappropriate buttons on the Service tab. If you need assistance in stopping NetVaultservices, contact BakBone Technical Support (page 6).

NOTE: If this is an evaluation installation, the length of the evaluation periodand the number of days left in that period are displayed. If a permanent keyis installed prior to the expiration of the evaluation period, both keys arelisted. When the evaluation period expires, that information is removed fromthis display.

NOTE: When stopping NetVault, wait for at least 30 seconds after theservice shows Stopped before restarting the service to ensure that allprocesses were stopped correctly.

Page 352: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

340 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator’s Service tab is shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Service Tab includes:

� Current State: Shows if NetVault is running or stopped.

� Stop NetVault: Click this button to stop the NetVault service.

� Start NetVault: Click the button to start the NetVault service.

Packages TabThe Packages tab is an alternative way to install or remove NetVault ApplicationPlugin Module software. The APM installation procedure is detailed in InstallingNetVault Plugins and APM’s (page 25).

The Packages tab is useful when NetVault plugin software is to be installed locallyon a NetVault client (without a NetVault interface), rather than remotely from theNetVault server.

Page 353: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 341

The NetVault Configurator’s Packages tab is shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Packages Tab includes:

� Install Software: Click this button to install new software (i.e., plugins) to theserver. Note that this only installs packages on the local machine. To install apackage on another NetVault machine, use the Client Management window.

� Installed Packages: The list of packages installed on this machine, alongwith the date installed and any flags associated with the package.

� Remove Software: Click this button to remove selected software from thismachine. To remove software from another machine, use the ClientManagement window.

General TabThe General Tab allows you to change the pathnames of the directories used byNetVault, select a language and set buffer sizes.

Page 354: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

342 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator’s General tab is shown in the following figure:

Information available on the General Tab includes:

� Generate debugging files: When enabled, a normal level of trace isgenerated for all processes. A trace file is created for each process and placedin a trace directory in the root of the NetVault directory. No additional action isrequired to create normal level trace. To create higher levels of trace theprograms.cfg file must be modified to set the appropriate trace level.

� Database Directory: The pathname of the NetVault database directory.

� Trace Directory: The pathname of the NetVault trace directory.

� Log Directory: The pathname of the NetVault log directory.

NOTE: Trace generates large files very quickly, and some processes aremore verbose than others. Make sure you have sufficient space to storetrace files and leave trace turned on only as long as you need it. Someprocesses may need to be restarted before doing a trace. Consult TechnicalSupport (page 6) for assistance with trace levels and restarting processes.

Page 355: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 343

� Temporary Directory: The pathname of the NetVault temporary directory.

� Language Selection: Choose the desired language to be used in NetVault.Normally the only selection available is English, unless the installation hasbeen localized.

� Minimum network send buffer size (Kb): Controls the minimum size ofkernel memory NetVault can use to buffer data on network sockets. If theminimum buffer size is increased, performance increases.

� Maximum network send buffer size (Kb): Controls the maximum size ofkernel memory NetVault can use to buffer data on network sockets. If themaximum buffer size is decreased, the reliability of the connection may beincreased.

� Minimum network receive buffer size (Kb): Controls the size of the receivebuffer. See minimum send buffer for further explanation.

� Maximum network receive buffer size (Kb): Controls the size of the receivebuffer. See maximum send buffer for further explanation.

� Package Install System Check: When enabled, NetVault checks theinstalled packages and makes sure they are for the operating system thepackage requires. For instance, if you attempt to install a Solaris package on aWindows machine a warning message appears.

Plugin Options TabThe Plugin Options tab contains information and the unique settings for the pluginsinstalled on your machine.

NOTE: Make sure you have enough space allocated for these directories ifyou are relocating them. For example, relocating the tmp directory to a newlocation without enough space causes backup and restore jobs to fail.NetVault requires some temp space as a working area for creating andretrieving previous indexes. Also allocate enough space for the NetVaultdatabase to grow if media is not being rotated.

Page 356: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

344 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

An example of the NetVault Configurator’s Plugin Options tab is shown in thefollowing figure:

Because the information appearing in this tab varies by plugin, the options andsettings will be different for each installation. If you do not understand any of theseoptions, contact Technical Support (page 6).

Fire Wall TabThe Fire Wall Tab allows you to identify ports through which data can be transferredacross a secured network firewall. The port identification must be configured on themachines with attached devices.

NOTE: Make sure that the specified ports within the firewall are open andproperly configured.

Page 357: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 345

The NetVault Configurator’s Fire Wall Tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Fire Wall tab includes:

� Valid Ports for Devices: Enter a comma or dash-separated list of valid portID’s in the box.

GUI TabSettings in the GUI tab allow you to specific screen refresh rates, change displaycolors, control messages in the Jobs window and set the number of messagesappearing in the Logs window.

The GUI tab includes an individual tab for each of the settings available, asdescribed below:

GUI Tab (Refresh Rates)Settings in the Refresh Rates tab control the speed at which the screen is updatedin the GUI to reflect changes in NetVault. Small numbers increase the rate of screenupdate at the expense of increased CPU load. Large refresh rates slow the screenupdate but lightens the CPU load.

Page 358: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

346 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

The Refresh Rates tab within the NetVault Configurator’s GUI tab appears as shownin the following figure:

Information available on the Refresh Rates tab within the GUI tab includes:

� Job refresh rate in milliseconds: The rate of screen update for the Jobswindow.

� Device refresh rate in milliseconds: The rate of screen update for the Devicewindow.

� Job Monitor refresh rate in milliseconds: The rate of screen update for theJob Monitor window.

GUI Tab (Colors)Settings in the Colors tab control the color of the three states of jobs in the Jobswindow status tab.

Page 359: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 347

The Colors tab within the NetVault Configurator’s GUI tab appears as shown in thefollowing figure:

The colors red, green and blue are used in various combinations to display thescheduled, running and completed jobs in the Jobs window. Increasing ordecreasing the RGB values changes the colors. Color intensity can be changed foreach of the following:

� Color of scheduled jobs (RGB)

� Color of running jobs (RGB)

� Color of completed jobs (RGB)

GUI Tab (Jobs)The option available in the Jobs Tab of the NetVault Configurator GUI tab allowsyou to override the default constraint of supplying a target set for duplicate media.

Page 360: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

348 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

The Jobs tab within the NetVault Configurator’s GUI Tab appears as shown in thefollowing figure:

Information available on the Jobs tab within the GUI tab includes:

� Permit Duplicate Phase with no Target Set: A target set is required forduplicate media unless this option is selected to override it. If multipleduplication jobs claim all the drives to read the source media, there will be nodrives available for the target media. To prevent a deadlock situation whenusing the same target for all your duplicates, leave this option cleared.

GUI Tab (Logging)The Logging tab within the GUI tab allows you to control the number of log messagesstored. The number of log messages affects the speed of opening the logs windowand the disk space used to store the messages. This is especially important whencontrolling a domain server over a network or a dial-up connection. Setting anunlimited number of job messages on an NT system can use all available systemmemory and render the machine unusable. Contact Technical Support (page 6) forassistance in setting the number of log messages.

Page 361: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 349

The Logging tab within the NetVault Configurator’s GUI Tab appears as shown inthe following figure:

Information available on the Logging tab within the GUI tab includes:

� Maximum log messages in log window: Enter the desired number ofmessages in the box or click the up and down arrows until the desired numberappears. By allowing only 1,000 log messages, the amount of used disk spaceis kept to a minimum.

Logging Daemon TabNetVault’s logging daemon sends warning messages to the screen when thethresholds set in the Logging Daemon tab are in danger of being exceeded.

Page 362: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

350 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator’s Logging Daemon tab appears as shown in the followingfigure:

Information available in the Logging Daemon tab includes:

� Disk Space Warning Threshold (percent full): Specifies the percentage ofspace which can be used for the tmp directory of the NetVault database onWindows NT systems only, based on the disk or partition that NetVault isinstalled on. When this level is reached, NetVault logs a message to inform youthat you are running out of free space and also sends a warning to the NTevent viewer. Administrators should check the log messages and applyappropriate measures to assure adequate free space.

� Log file page size (Kb): The value entered here is the size of each of the files(two) created at the time NetVault is opened. Activity is logged to the first fileuntil the allocated space in that file is used. When the first file is full, NetVaultcreates a third file of the same size and continues logging activity to the secondfile. These files are created as sparse files, so that if you run out of hard diskspace logging can continue in the pre-allocated files.

CAUTION: If the disk space level is exceeded, the NetVault Database canbe damaged.

Page 363: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 351

� Message Response Interval (in milliseconds): When opening a Logswindow the opening progress dialog box appears. The Cancel button on thisdialog box allows you to cancel the Logs window. Decreasing the responseinterval increases the responsiveness of the Cancel button at the expense ofCPU performance.

� Outgoing message bundle size: Log messages are sent to the Logs windowin bundles to improve performance, the size of which is defined in this option.

� Minimum time (in milliseconds) between progress updates: The progressdialog box that appears when opening logs displays the number of logmessages loaded. This setting specifies how often the dialog box informationis updated.

� Minimum warning level to send to system log: This setting controls howmuch of the NetVault logs are sent to the operating system logs.

Media Manager TabThe options in the Media Manager tab allow you to control the life of savesets on apiece of imported media, use barcodes as labels and set the backup and restorepriority levels.

The NetVault Configurator’s Media Manager Tab appears as shown in the followingfigure:

Information available in the Media Manager tab includes:

Page 364: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

352 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

� Minimum life for imported backups (days): When media is deleted from theNetVault database or a tape from another NetVault server is used, it appears inthe Media Management window as FOREIGN. To access the data throughNetVault, scan the tape to build the contents back into the database using thetape index. The value entered here controls the life of the savesets on the tapeonce it has been scanned. Any existing life spans of savesets on tape remainin effect after being scanned; the setting in this option affects only expiredsavesets and designates its life span after being imported into the database.

� Use barcodes as labels: When selected, this option automatically uses thebarcode of a tape as the tape label. The default naming convention is <servername><date>. When using barcodes you may want the tape name to matchthe barcode. This option applies only if your library has a barcode reader andyour tapes have barcodes.

� Priority Settings: Backup and Restore jobs can be given specific priorities tochange the order in which the jobs are performed. The remaining options in theMedia Manager set default priorities as shown in the following table:

The following information applies to the types of priorities:

� For Restore, Backup, Label and Blank requests, 1 is the highest level and 0runs the request in the background.

� A Continuation request occurs when an unfinished Restore or Backup jobrequires more than one piece of media to complete successfully. It is possiblefor a job paused for media changes to be pre-empted by another request. Inorder to allow the original Restore or Backup request to continue withoutinterruption, set the priority number of the continuation Restore or Backup to asmaller number than that of other requests.

Network Manager TabThe Network Manager tab settings allow you to specify the amount of time NetVaultwaits with no activity before dropping network connections, and broadcasts to localnetwork machines.

Types of PrioritiesPriorityNumber

Restore Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 20

Continuation Restore Request Priority Boost 5

Backup Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 30

Continuation Backup Request Priority Boost 5

Label Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10

Blank Request Priority (1=Highest, 0=Background) 10

Page 365: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 353

The NetVault Configurator’s Network Manager tab contains three additional tabsand appears as shown in the following figure:

Network Manager Tab (Timeouts)Settings in the Timeouts tab within the Network Manager tab, which control the timeNetVault waits to make remote connections, are shown in the figure above andinclude the following:

� Time (in seconds) to complete a remote connection: The maximumamount of time NetVault attempts to make a remote connection.

� Time (in seconds) wait before dropping inactive connection: Themaximum amount of time NetVault leaves an inactive session running beforeclosing the connection.

� Keep Alive rate (in seconds): NetVault sends broadcasts at designatedintervals during active connections (e.g., during backups and restores) toassure that the network connection is still active between the NetVaultmachines in the domain. This setting allows you to send message more orless frequently.

� Time (in seconds) between availability broadcasts: An availabilitybroadcast is a message sent from one NetVault machine to all other NetVaultmachines informing them of its name and how it can be contacted. The valuein this option defines the time between availability broadcasts. If the interval istoo small network traffic increases, too large and the list of available machines

Page 366: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

354 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

may not be displayed as quickly as needed. You can manually add anundisplayed client using the find utility.

� Time (in seconds) between security broadcasts: The security broadcastresults in the display of a key on the machine icon seen in the ClientManagement window. The key in the icon indicates the presence of securityand the need for a password to access that machine.

Network Manager Tab (Connections)Settings in the Connections tab within the Network Manager tab control broadcaststo local machines.

The Connections tab within the NetVault Configurator’s Network Manager tabappears as shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Connections tab includes:

� Broadcast details to machines on local networks: To automatically displaymachines in a client’s window, select this option. If this option is cleared youcan add clients only by using the Find utility in the client’s window to locate thedesired client. When this option is cleared, the amount of network trafficgenerated by NetVault is reduced; however, adding clients becomes more

Page 367: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 355

complicated. This option should only be cleared when it is necessary toreduce network traffic.

� Preferred network address: Only used when your machine is connected tomultiple networks either via multiple nics or by virtual IP addressing. To usethis option, enter the IP address of the interface (not the address of themachine) you prefer NetVault to use as its primary access point no matterwhich network(s) the machine is connected to. If this primary network accessis not available, NetVault uses one of the other available networks.

� Comma separated list of barred address(es): The list of addresses youwant to prevent NetVault from using should be entered in this box, separatedby a comma.

Using a combination of these two options can be very helpful to direct yournetwork’s traffic. For instance, you may have a network specifically for backups andanother network you do not want to use for backup data. In this case you can barone network so that NetVault will not use it at all and force the network designatedfor backup traffic to be the first one NetVault uses.

Schedule Manager TabThe Schedule Manager Tab of the NetVault Configurator allows you to set thenumber of days job histories and status are kept, as well as specify the number ofactive jobs that can run simultaneously.

NOTE: NetVault uses UDP broadcasts. UDP does not route over differentnetwork segments and machines on different segments do not appearautomatically. They must be found manually.

CAUTION: Be careful that you do not bar all networks on your server sinceyou will not be able to perform any backups.

Page 368: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

356 Appendix FUsing the NetVault Configurator

The NetVault Configurator’s Schedule Manager tab appears as shown in thefollowing figure:

Information available on the Schedule Manager tab includes:

� Number of days to keep job history: This setting limits the number of days ofjob information displayed in the Jobs window’s History tab.

� Number of days to keep job status: This setting limits the number of days ofjob information displayed in the Job window’s Status tab.

� Maximum simultaneously active jobs: The value entered in this setting limitsthe number of jobs than can be running at any one time. Because each runningjob consumes a small amount of shared memory, it can be advantageous tospecify a small number of jobs that can run simultaneously. When setting thisvalue, keep in mind that only a small number of jobs can be writing to media atany given time. If you submit a large number of jobs, those over the limit willstay pending until the required resources are available, affected also by thenumber of available tape drives.

Page 369: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 357

Security TabIn the Security tab you can set a new password for the NetVault server or clientinstallation and disable security. When security is disabled, the machine can beaccessed by any NetVault Server.

The NetVault Configurator’s Security tab appears as shown in the following figure:

Information available in the Security tab includes:

� Disable Security: When selected, this option allows any NetVault server toadd your machine to its list of clients. Clear this option to require the NetVaultserver to provide a password in order to add your machine to a list of clients.

� New Password: To change the machine password enter it in this box.

� Confirm Password: Enter the new password again in this box.

Page 370: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 371: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

APPENDIX G

Using the Reporting ToolUsing the Reporting Tool - 361

Running nvreport from the Command Line - 361

Report Arguments - 361

Simple Report Example - 362

Using Filters Example - 363

Sorting Output - 364

Creating Custom Templates - 365

� Making New Templates - 366� Using the Server Argument - 367

Fields Available for Reports - 367

� Report: jobdefinitions (jd) - 368� Report: jobhistory (jh) - 369� Report: advancedoptions (ao) - 370� Report: schedules (sc) - 370� Report: backuptargets (bt) - 370� Report: selections (se) - 370

Constants and Syntax - 370

Page 372: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 373: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 361

Using the Reporting Tool

NetVault provides the ability to produce reports on jobs, drives and media through the use ofa command line reporting utility.

Reports are based on template files that define the information and layout of the reports.The templates can be customized to your specifications.

Information in the reports can be sorted and filtered using mathematical operators. Becausethe report utility uses a command line method, it is recommended that you use templatesand batch or script files to automate report generation.

Running nvreport from the Command Line

The nvreport binary is located in the netvault/util directory. Report templates arestored in the /netvault6/reports/templates directory.

To access the help system for the nvreport utility, navigate to /netvault/util and run

nvreport -help

to list the syntax of nvreport which is

nvreport -argument value -argument value

Report Arguments

Valid report arguments are described in the following table:

Long ArgumentShort

ArgumentDescription

help h or ? Displays basic help information, includingdetails on how to request additional informa-tion.

reptype r Identifies the nvreport to be produced.

format f Identifies the fields to be included in thereport.

server v Identifies the server to be queried.

sort s Specifies how the output data is sorted.

include i Specified a set of conditions that must bemet for a record to be included in a report.

exclude e Specified a set of conditions that, when met,exclude items from a report.

template t Identifies the nvreport template to be used.

Page 374: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

362 Appendix GUsing the Reporting Tool

Simple Report Example

This section describes a simple process used to produce a report on jobs that have been runand their status.

Start with the jobhistory report. To run this report issue the command

nvreport -r jh

The report output appears as follows:

By default all the fields shown above are included in the report. To include specific fields,issue the command

nvreport -help fields jobhistory

to list the fields available for inclusion in this particular report. See Creating CustomTemplates (page 365) for a complete list of the fields available for each type of report.

To define the fields you want to include in the output, issue the following command

nvreport -r jh -f “%exitstatus %startdate %jobid” -s “%exitstatus%startdate %jobid”

which calls the jobhistory template (jh), includes fields (f) exitstatus, startdate and jobid andsorts (s) the report by exitstatus, startdate and jobid.

This produces the following output:

JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

1 1 1 backup 1 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00

2 1 1 backup 2 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00

3 1 1 backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:02:49

4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:00:26

JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

1 1 1 backup 1 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00

2 1 1 backup 2 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00

3 1 1 backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:02:49

4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:00:26

Exit Status Start Date JobID

Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 1

Page 375: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 363

Using Filters Example

A simple example of excluding data from the report output is explained in this section. Forthe report just produced you may want to only see the jobs run yesterday, not those run priorto yesterday.

To search for jobs with a start date greater than yesterday, issue the following command:

nvreport -r jh -i “startdate > 2000/10/23”

which returns the following output:

To use a filter string to include or exclude fields, apply the following argument:

“%[fieldname][operator][constant]”

for example: “%ID = 23”

where:

� fieldname can be any valid field name included in the report’s format string. To seethe list of valid field names issue the command

nvreport -help fields [report name]

� operator can be: greater than (>), greater than or equal to (>=), less than (<), lessthan or equal to (<=), equal to (=) and not equal to (!=).

� constant is the value you want to find in the specified field.

In addition, filtering expressions can be linked using the Boolean operator AND and OR.Brackets can be used to order the Boolean expressions as shown in the following simpleexample:

“(%jobid > 10 AND %instanceid <5) OR %jdefntype = restoreid”

Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 2

Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 3

Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 4

IMPORTANT: Using format only affects the fields shown in the report. Itdoes not affect the selection of records included in the output. To filter therecords in the output use the include and exclude arguments.

JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:00:26

Exit Status Start Date JobID

Page 376: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

364 Appendix GUsing the Reporting Tool

or in this more complex example:

nvreport -r jh -include “((%jobid > 10 AND %instanceid < 5) OR%phaseid = 12) OR (%jdefntype = restore AND %phaseid = 23)”

This example illustrates the way you can nest statements to create sophisticated filters.

Sorting Output

The sort argument is used to order the records included in a report’s output. The sortspecification format is

“%fieldname[+-]”

For example, if you entered %id+, the records are sorted in ascending order by ID. If youentered %title-, the records appear by title in descending order. Multiple sort expressionscan be combined in a specified order. For example, if you entered “%type+ %jobid+%title-”, the data is sorted by ascending type, then by ascending job ID, then bydescending title.

The command nvreport -r jh -s “%jobid+” returns the following output:

The command nvreport -r jh -s “%jobid-” returns this output:

Notice that the order of the jobs is reversed from that of the first report. Filter arguments canbe applied to any of the relevant fields in the report being run.

JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

1 1 1 backup 1 Backup <none> 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00

2 1 1 backup 2 Backup <none> 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00

3 1 1 backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:02:49

4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:00:26

JobID Inst Phase Title Type Exit Status Start Date Start Run Lngth

4 1 1 backup 4 Backup Backup Comp 24 Oct 2000 11:12 00:02:49

5 1 1 backup 3 Backup Backup Comp 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:26

2 1 1 backup 2 Backup <none> 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00

1 1 1 backup 1 Backup <none> 23 Oct 2000 14:33 00:00:00

Page 377: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 365

Creating Custom Templates

In order to prevent having to enter the series of commands used to produce a report eachtime you want to run the report, you can create and save report templates to be usedwhenever desired.

The following is one of the report templates located in the /netvault6/reports directory:

%REPTYPE jobdefinitions

%FORMAT “%ID %TITLE %TYPE %CLIENT::7 %PLUGIN %SCHEDTRIGGER”

%SORT %ID+

This template, the job definitions report, shows the basic fields and sort arguments used inthe report. The first line is the name of the report. The second line defines the format of thereport and the order of field display. The third line defines the sort for the data displayed inthe report output.

Note that one of the fields includes a double colon with a number after it. Each field isassigned a default number of characters for displaying its value. If you want to increase ordecrease the default value, enter the double colon and the number of characters to bedisplayed after the specific field.

In the job definitions report only six of the available fields are included for display in theoutput. The output of this report appears as follows:

The following example shows how to add another field to the list of included fields:

%REPTYPE jobdefinitions

%FORMAT “%ID %TITLE %TYPE %CLIENT::7 %PLUGIN %SCHEDTRIGGER%AOPTSVERIFY”

%SORT %ID+

IMPORTANT: Save the existing template to a new file name before makingchanges. Then you will always have the current template to begincustomizing new reports.

ID Title Type Client Plugin Trigger

1 backup 1 Backup elliott File System

2 backup 2 Backup elliott File System

3 backup 3 Backup elliott File System

4 backup 4 Backup elliott File System

Page 378: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

366 Appendix GUsing the Reporting Tool

The output from the second example now includes the Vrfy column and appears as follows:

You can filter the data appearing in the output by adding include or exclude statements. Onthe command line the syntax is -i or -include, whereas in a report template the argument ispreceeded with a % sign.

In the following example, the job history template, there is no filter applied:

%REPTYPE jobhistory

%FORMAT “%JOBID %INSTANCEID::4 %PHASEID %JDEFNTITLE %JDEFNTYPE%EXITSTATUS %STARTDATE %STARTTIME::5 %RUNTIME”

%SORT “%JOBID %INSTANCEID+ %PHASEID+”

When a filter is added the report appears as follows:

%REPTYPE jobhistory

%FORMAT “%JOBID %INSTANCEID::4 %PHASEID %JDEFNTITLE %JDEFNTYPE%EXITSTATUS %STARTDATE %STARTTIME::5 %RUNTIME”

%include “(%startdate > 2000/10/23) and (%exitstatus = backupcomplete)”

%SORT “%EXITSTATUS+”

Note the brackets around each filter statement. Also note the use of and to combine the twostatements. You can also use an or operator, if desired. When applying more than 2 filters, itis important to use double brackets to denote the order in which they should be applied.Make sure the order and logic of the filters is correct or the resulting output may not be whatyou expect.

You can also run multiple reports and direct the output into one large report.

Making New TemplatesWhen NetVault is installed, a default set of templates are stored in the installationdirectory. These templates are limited in scope and designed to be used as a basisfor building your specific templates.

When creating new templates, it is recommended that you store them in the/netvault6/reports/templates directory. If you explicitly reference templatesalways enter the entire pathname to locate and retrieve them.

ID Title Type Client Plugin Trigger Vrfy

1 backup 1 Backup elliott File System no

2 backup 2 Backup elliott File System yes

3 backup 3 Backup elliott File System no

4 backup 4 Backup elliott File System no

Page 379: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 367

Using the Server ArgumentAny NetVault server can run the report tool. Incorporating the -v command in thereport allows you to run a report on your NetVault server remotely from your ownworkstation as long as NetVault has been installed on it.

Running reports over the network generates a considerable amount of traffic,depending on the type of report being run and the amount of information on yoursystem. Information sent over the network is not filtered until it reaches thedestination machine. So no matter how much data the report outputs, you mustsearch all the data present. In this type of case, consider logging in remotely to theNetVault server and running nvreport locally.

Fields Available for Reports

The Fields folder located within the netvault6/reports folder contains a file for each ofthe report templates each of which lists:

� The fields available for that report type.

� The number of characters the field outputs. This is the default length of the field and itcan be modified. Add a double colon and the number of characters you want to outputdirectly after the field name (e.g., Trigger::10, where Trigger is normally 12).

� The type of data stored in the field (i.e., integer, string, date, time, etc.). The type of datain the field is the type that must be used whenever you include conditional statements inyour report. For instance, to output only jobs scheduled to run on January 10th, theformat is “schedDate = 2000/01/10”. DO NOT MODIFY THIS VALUE.

� A “nicename” which is the column heading for included fields. For instance, the fieldphaseid is output to the column heading of Phase. The nicename can be modified.

CAUTION: Do not change the information in the Fields folder withoutassistance from Technical Support.

Page 380: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

368 Appendix GUsing the Reporting Tool

The following tables list, for each type of report, the fields available for use:

Report: jobdefinitions (jd)

aoptsBackupKeepCount aoptsPreScriptArg id

aoptsBackupType aoptsUsePreScript Options

aoptsCompress aoptsUsePostScript Plugin

aoptsDuplicate aoptsVerify RestoreClient

aoptsDupSchedSet btargAnyDevice schedDate

aoptsDupTargSet btargAutoLabel schedDaysOfMonth

aoptsKeepForNumBacks btargDeviceTree schedDaysOfWeek

aoptsKeepForTime btargFirstJob schedMethod

aoptsKeepTime btargGroup schedName

aoptsMigrate btargMID schedRepeatPeriod

aoptsName btargMinSpace schedTIme

aoptsOrigLife btargName schedTrigger

aoptsOwnDiscardLife btargProtectAfter schedType

aoptsOwnLifeLength btargReuseMedia schedWeeksOfMonth

aoptsPostScript btargSpecMinSpace selecName

aoptsPostScriptArg btargTargetMedia selecTree

aoptsPreScript Client Title

Type

Page 381: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 369

Report: jobhistory (jh)

enddate jdefnbtargMinSpace

endtime jdefnbtargName

exitstatus jdefnbtargProtectAfter

instanceid jdefnbtargReuseMedia

jdefnaoptsBackupKeepCount jdefnbtargSpecMinSpace

jdefnaoptsBackupType jdefnbtargTargetMedia

jdefnaoptsCompress jdefnId

jdefnaoptsDuplicate jdefnClient

jdefnaoptsDupSchedSet jdefnOptions

jdefnaoptsDupTargSet jdefnPlugin

jdefnaoptsKeepForNumBacks jdefnRestoreClient

jdefnaoptsKeepForTIme jdefnTitle

jdefnaoptsKeepTime jdefnType

jdefnaoptsMigrate jdefnschedDate

jdefnaoptsName jdefnschedDaysOfMonth

jdefnaoptsOrigLife jdefnschedDaysOfWeek

jdefnaoptsOwnDiscardLife jdefnschedMethod

jdefnaoptsOwnLifeLength jdefnschedName

jdefnaoptsPostScript jdefnschedRepeatPeriod

jdefnaoptsPostScriptArg jdefnschedTime

jdefnaoptsPreScript jdefnschedTrigger

jdefnaoptsPreScriptArg jdefnschedType

jdefnaoptsUsePostScript jdefnschedWeeksOfMonth

jdefnaoptsUsePreScript jdefnselecName

jdefnaoptsVerify jdefnselecTree

jdefnbtargAnyDevice JobID

jdefnbtargDeviceTree phaseid

jdefnbtargAutoLabel runtime

jdefnbtargFirstJob starttdate

jdefnbtargGroup starttime

jdefnbtargMID

Page 382: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

370 Appendix GUsing the Reporting Tool

Report: advancedoptions (ao)

Report: schedules (sc)

Report: backuptargets (bt)

Report: selections (se)

Constants and Syntax

This section defines the formats (syntax) allowed for constants:

BackupKeepCount KeepForTime PostScriptArg

BackupType KeepTime PostScript

Compress Migrate PreScriptArg

Duplicate Name PreScript

DupSchedSet OrigLife UsePostScript

DupTargSet OwnDiscardLife UsePreScript

KeepForNumBacks OwnLifeLength Verify

Date Method Time

DaysOfMonth Name Trigger

DaysOfWeek RepeatPeriod Type

Weeks OfMonth

AnyDevice Group ProtectAfter

AutoLabel MID ReuseMedia

DeviceTree MinSpace SpecMinSpace

FirstJob Name TargetMedia

Name Tree

Constant Formats

string any character enclosed in single or double quotes

integer a number

time HH:MM:SS (e.g., 22:10:11)HHMMSS (e.g., 221011)

Page 383: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 371

timepassed HH:MM:SS (e.g., 22:10:11)HHMMSS (e.g., 221011)

date YYYY/MM/DD (e.g., 2000/04/26)YYYYMMDD (e.g., 20000426)

boolean YesNoTrueFalse

hdwmycount NNNN[HDWMY] 12H 2W 564M 44Y

daysinweek A string of days using the following abbreviations:SU = SundayMO = MondayTU = TuesdayWE = WednesdayTH = ThursdayFR = FridaySA = Saturday(e.g., MOWEFRSU for Monday, Wednesday, Friday and Sun-day)

daysinmonth A string of dates separated by commas (e.g., 1,2,4,8,10)

weeksinmonth A string indicating the number of the week in the month (e.g.,145 for the first, fourth and fifth weeks, 13L for the first, thirdand Last week, etc.)

selectiontree N/A

pluginscreen N/A

Constant Formats

Page 384: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 385: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

GlossaryA

B

Add Library window The Add Library window controls the adding or modifying of librariesfor the selected server. The Library Name field shows the selectedlibrary name, once added. The window contains tabbed control andinformation areas to allow different aspects of the library to be setup and viewed.

Add Standalone Drivewindow

The Add Standalone Drive window controls the adding or modifyingof simple devices to the selected server. The Device Name fieldshows the selected device name, once added. The window con-tains control and information areas to allow the device to be chosenand added and the device details viewed. There is also a Configurebutton to allow the parameters of the device to be changed includ-ing Configuration, Performance and Statistics settings.

Application PluginModule (APM)

An Application Plugin Module provides a bridge from NetVault toanother application. This allows you to use the NetVault GUI to con-trol and manage your backup and restore operations in other data-bases. APM’s are sold separately; contact your BakBonerepresentative for more information.

backup A NetVault backup is the saving of computer data onto media,under the control of a NetVault Server. With NetVault, many typesof data may be backed up using the appropriate plugin (e.g.NetVault Database plugin, NT File System plugin, NT Registry plu-gin, UNIX File System plugin, etc.).

Backup window The NetVault Backup window controls the scheduling of backupsfor the selected server and Job Title. The window contains tabbedcontrol areas to allow different aspects of the backup to be set up

Page 386: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

374 Glossary

C

D

Backup Set A Backup Set is the complete set of data stored on one or moreitems of media for a single backup job. The complete Backup Setmay be contained as one Saveset on a single item of media, or itcan be spread over several items of media (e.g. tapes), occupying asingle unique Saveset on each media item.

Client Managementwindow

The NetVault Client Management window displays client informa-tion for the selected server. The window contains two list areas todisplay available machines and those added to NetVault as clients;there is also an area to find NetVault Machines not currently dis-played in either list.

Configurator The NetVault Configurator is a standard tool included with theNetVault installation. Normally the Configurator is used to start andstop NetVault services. It also provides information about themachine, the license(s) purchased for the machine, the softwareinstalled on the machine and a variety of other options used to man-age security, interface appearance, logging and many more. Forcomplete information on the NetVault Configurator see Using theNetVault Configurator (page 335).

cleaning drive A cleaning drive is a drive with designated slots used to clean tapes.

distributed devices NetVault can use distributed devices, i.e. devices can be connectedto any NetVault Node (NetVault server or client), not just to theNetVault server.

device A NetVault device is any equipment which can hold NetVault media(e.g. simple tape drives, tape libraries, pseudo disk libraries, opticaldrives, etc.). NetVault devices are only controlled by a NetVaultserver, whatever computer they may be physically connected to(e.g. to a local or remote NetVault client, as well as locally on theNetVault server).

domain A NetVault domain is the term used to signify a group of computerscomprising a NetVault server, and a number of NetVault clients,(which may be on the local network, remotely via a bridge, gatewaythe Internet, etc.).

Page 387: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 375

F

G

I

J

Device Managementwindow

The NetVault Device Management window controls the devicesadded to the selected server. The window contains tabbed areas toallow different control or viewing of various functions

Domain Managementwindow

The NetVault Domain Management window allows NetVault serversto be viewed and controlled.

Firewall A system designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a pri-vate network. Firewalls can be implemented in both hardware andsoftware or a combination of both. Firewalls are frequently used toprevent unauthorized internet users from accessing private net-works connected to the internet, especially intranets. All messagesentering or leaving the intranet pass through the firewall, whichexamines each message and blocks those that do not meet thespecified security criteria.

Full backup A Full backup is a complete copy of selected data.

GUI The GUI or Graphical User Interface is used to access the windowsand functions provided by NetVault to manage your hardware andsoftware configurations and data storage. The interface containsthe menu bar, command toolbars and a status line to aid in choos-ing the desired function.

Instance The Instance of a job is a number representing the number of timesthat this particular job has been submitted. The first time a new jobis submitted, the number is always 1, the second time it is 2, etc.(even if you have used View/Edit Job to modify the job in betweensubmissions, provided you do not change the job title).

Incremental backup An Incremental backup is a copy of the changes made to files ordatabases since the last backup was performed.

Jobs window The NetVault Jobs window displays jobs submitted for the selectedserver. The window contains tabbed areas to allow viewing of variousfunctions.

Page 388: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

376 Glossary

L

M

N

Logs window The NetVault Logs window displays log entries for processes controlledby the selected server. Each log message is preceded with a color-coded dot, which signifies the message's level of importance.

License The authorization number(s) for the BakBone product(s) you have pur-chased.

Library A library is any combination of tapes, multi-drive tape jukeboxes,sequential devices, autochangers, autoloaders, disks, etc. NetVaultcontrols the devices in a library and libraries can be shared among cli-ents.

Media Managementwindow

The NetVault Media Management window allows media to be exam-ined for the selected server. The window contains a Media selectionarea and Details tabbed areas to allow different aspects of either themedia or saveset to be examined.

NAS NAS is the acronym for Network Attached Storage. Devices used instorage management can be directly attached to a network andaccessed by all clients on the network.

NetVault Database The NetVault database contains all the details for the installation of theNetVault server, including information on configuration, keys, logs,media and schedules. This information is critical to keeping NetVaultoperations available and recoverable in case of a catastrophic event.

Node A NetVault Node is any networked computer with NetVault (server orclient) software installed. A Node can act as a NetVault server for oneNetVault domain, and at the same time be a NetVault client to anotherNetVault server in another NetVault domain.

Page 389: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 377

P

R

Phase When the NetVault Backup Advanced Option, Duplicate is used the dupli-cate job is allocated the same Job ID and Job Title as the backup job, butthe Phase for the duplicate job will read 2 (so that the duplicate can beidentified). In all other cases, the Phase of jobs will read 1. This informa-tion is shown in the NetVault Server Status window, Job Status area.

plugin A plugin is a NetVault program module designed to add functionality toNetVault core features. Plugins included with the NetVault installation arethe Data Copy, Consolidate File System Backups, File System and RawDevice.

Policy Manage-ment Window

The Policy Management window organizes and accesses the backup Pol-icy Sets you have saved for selection, target and advanced options.

Policy Set A Policy Set is a collection of options defined for a job, or portion of a job,saved for future re-use.

priorities A Priority assigns the order in which jobs run. Default settings are found inthe Using the NetVault Configurator (page 337). In addition, individual jobpriorities can be set to override the default settings. For more information,see The Media Requests Tab (page 72) in Chapter 4.

restore A NetVault restore is the restoration of computer data from media, underthe control of a NetVault server. With NetVault, many types of data maybe restored using the appropriate plugin (e.g. NetVault Database plugin,NT File System plugin, NT Registry plugin, UNIX File System plugin,etc.). Data may be restored from a tape imported from another NetVaultserver's device using the media Scan facility. Data may also be restoredto a different Target client, Location or Name, from that of the originalbackup.

Restore window The NetVault Restore window controls the scheduling of restores for theselected server and Job Title. The window contains tabbed control areasto allow different aspects of the restore to be set up.

Page 390: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

378 Glossary

S

T

Saveset A Saveset is the set of data stored on a single item of media for a NetVaultbackup job. An item of media (e.g. a tape) may contain several Savesets,each a single Backup Set for a job; but a Backup Set may be large enoughto be spread over several items of media, occupying a unique Saveset oneach media item.

Selection Sets Selection Sets allow often used selections in several tabs of both theBackup and Restore windows to be saved and used for multiple jobs. Thistime saving feature is described in Using Policy (Set) Templates (page263).

Server A NetVault server controls all backup and restores for all NetVault clientsin a NetVault domain., including the server machine itself acting as a cli-ent. NetVault devices are only controlled by a NetVault server, whereverthey may be physically connected (e.g. to a remote NetVault client, as wellas locally). A NetVault server may be remotely controlled using NetVaultDomain Management.

Server Statuswindow

The NetVault Server Status window displays status information for theselected server. The window contains individual, re-sizeable areas to dis-play each type of information.

Shared Devices A device being used by two or more machines through a shared-SCSI orSAN (Storage Area Network) is a shared device. A shared drive can beused by NetVault as a local drive when backing up the client, increasingthe efficiency of data transfer across the network.

SAN (StorageArea Network)

The Storage Area Network provides the ability to attach devices to clientwith high-speed connections to provide centralized tape storage and drivesharing.

target media Target media is a specific tape, disk or other piece of media where databeing restored is placed.

Template A template is a block or pattern used as a basis to build a new function(e.g., customized reports).

Page 391: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 379

V

tracing Tracing is a NetVault utility that allows you to capture and store a history ofevents. With this file you can provide Technical Support (page 6) withenough information to diagnose a problem.

Tree A tree is another name for a hierarchical list which indents from trunk tobranch to twig, etc. (but upside-down!). It is the method used for displayingdata in both the NetVault Backup and Restore windows, using the relevantplugin or APM.

Triggered Job NetVault backup and restore jobs can be created and saved as triggeredjobs. They are only added to the schedule list when they are triggeredusing a provided nvtrigger program.

virtual library A virtual library is a library set up in a temporary area, such as a harddrive, used to perform disk staging and tape cleaning.

Page 392: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide
Page 393: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

Aadd library window ................................................................................................ 373add standalone drive window ............................................................................... 373adding ..................................................................................................................... 81

a NetVault Client ............................................................................................... 111clients ............................................................................................................... 111libraries............................................................................................................... 81shared libraries ................................................................................................... 87

Adding LibrariesAdd Library Screen Functions .............................................................................. 82

Administrator’s Guide, about .................................................................................... 4advanced features ................................................................................................ 271

backup life ........................................................................................................ 274compression ..................................................................................................... 274duplication ........................................................................................................ 275nvtrigger commands .......................................................................................... 285pre and post scripts ........................................................................................... 278verify after backup ............................................................................................. 275

advanced options tab ........................................................................................... 273in backup window .............................................................................................. 178in restore window .............................................................................................. 217

advancedoptions report ........................................................................................ 370AIX 4.2/4.3

installing NetVault software on AIX 4.2/4.3 ............................................................ 16APM (Application Plugin Module)......................................................................... 373Archive (Advanced Backup Option) ..................................................................... 274

Bbackup

consolidating..................................................................................................... 185consolidating sets.............................................................................................. 186definition ........................................................................................................... 373full .................................................................................................................... 375incremental ....................................................................................................... 375

INDEX

Page 394: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

382 Index

life .................................................................................................................... 274NetVault Database............................................................................................. 149raw device (NT) ................................................................................................. 187raw device (UNIX) ............................................................................................. 192selecting data .................................................................................................... 162set .................................................................................................................... 374simple ............................................................................................................... 180to Specific Media ............................................................................................... 175window ..................................................................................................... 159, 373

backup life option .................................................................................................. 274Backup Management

Backup window functions ................................................................................... 160Menus ........................................................................................................ 161

Incremental Backup Procedure........................................................................... 179Using the Advanced Options Tab........................................................................ 178Using the Backup Options Tab ........................................................................... 168

General Backup Options .............................................................................. 169Using the Schedule Tab ..................................................................................... 173Using the Selections Tab ................................................................................... 162Using the Target Tab ......................................................................................... 174

Device Options ............................................................................................ 174General Options .......................................................................................... 177Media Options ............................................................................................. 175

backup options tab, in backup window................................................................. 168backup saveset commands, in media management ............................................ 135backup saveset, status ......................................................................................... 135backup sets

consolidating ..................................................................................................... 186copying ............................................................................................................. 152

backup tab, in media management ...................................................................... 136backup through mount points ............................................................................... 170backup window ............................................................................................... 52, 159

2000 backup options.......................................................................................... 171backup options tab............................................................................................. 168

miscellaneous switches................................................................................ 170buttons.............................................................................................................. 160commands ........................................................................................................ 161general backup options ...................................................................................... 169NT backup options............................................................................................. 171schedule tab...................................................................................................... 173selections tab .................................................................................................... 162tabs .................................................................................................................. 160type of backup ................................................................................................... 169

Page 395: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 383

UNIX Filesystem backup options ........................................................................ 172backups ................................................................................................................. 157

copying ..................................................................................................... 151, 152incremental ....................................................................................................... 179restoring incremental ................................................................................. 180, 218selections in NT ................................................................................................. 163selections in W2K .............................................................................................. 167simple ............................................................................................................... 181

backuptarget report............................................................................................... 370BakBone Software .................................................................................................... 6basics ...................................................................................................................... 41block size .............................................................................................................. 297

Ccleaning

automatic interval .............................................................................................. 100drives.......................................................................................................... 97, 374life of media....................................................................................................... 100manual.............................................................................................................. 101slots.................................................................................................................... 97

clientadding (to NetVault Server) ................................................................................ 111finding Unlisted NetVault Machine ...................................................................... 109Install Software (optional plugin) ......................................................................... 108Properties ................................................................................................. 108, 121

client management........................................................................................ 103, 105available NetVault machines .............................................................................. 106clients ....................................................................................................... 107, 108Find NetVault Machine ............................................................................... 108, 109

client management window .................................................................... 48, 105, 374client status, in server status window ................................................................... 143client transfer nodes ............................................................................................... 61command line reports ........................................................................................... 361

arguments......................................................................................................... 361example ............................................................................................................ 362fields................................................................................................................. 367filtering.............................................................................................................. 363sorting .............................................................................................................. 364templates .......................................................................................................... 365templates, new .................................................................................................. 366

command toolbar .................................................................................................... 45commands

Page 396: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

384 Index

in logs window ................................................................................................... 252in restore window............................................................................................... 201status................................................................................................................ 243

configurator ..................................................................................... 31, 335, 359, 374fire wall tab........................................................................................................ 344general tab ........................................................................................................ 341GUI tab ............................................................................................................. 345license tab......................................................................................................... 338logging daemon tab ........................................................................................... 349machine tab ...................................................................................................... 337media manager tab ............................................................................................ 351network manager tab ......................................................................................... 352packages tab..................................................................................................... 340plugin options tab .............................................................................................. 343running ............................................................................................................. 306schedule manager tab........................................................................................ 355security tab ....................................................................................................... 357service tab ........................................................................................................ 339

configuringLinux................................................................................................................... 38NetVault.............................................................................................................. 38

consolidate file system backups plugin ................................................................ 182consolidating

backups ............................................................................................................ 185constants, report ................................................................................................... 370copying

backup sets............................................................................................... 152, 268backups ............................................................................................................ 152data .................................................................................................................. 151

CTN (client transfer node) ...................................................................................... 61

Ddata copy plugin .................................................................................................... 151data stream ........................................................................................................... 302data, searching for .................................................................................................. 57database

management ..................................................................................................... 147recovery............................................................................................................ 147restore .............................................................................................................. 150sizing .................................................................................................................. 24

debugging ............................................................................................................... 37details tab, in media management........................................................................ 129

Page 397: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 385

device management window .................................................................... 47, 64, 375device logs tab .................................................................................................... 71devices tab.......................................................................................................... 66

drive commands ............................................................................................ 68entry/exit port commands ............................................................................... 70

drive lights........................................................................................................... 65icons................................................................................................................... 65media requests tab .............................................................................................. 72tabs .................................................................................................................... 65

device management windowsdevices tab

library commands .......................................................................................... 67device status, in server status window ................................................................. 142devices .................................................................................................................... 61

adding ................................................................................................................ 77adding in W2K ..................................................................................................... 92adding shared standalone drives .......................................................................... 77connections......................................................................................................... 61creating............................................................................................................... 94creating virtual libraries ...................................................................................... 331definition of ................................................................................................. 61, 374distributed ......................................................................................................... 374generating......................................................................................................... 332in Windows NT .................................................................................................... 63planning a shared installation ............................................................................... 61setting up ............................................................................................................ 63shared .............................................................................................................. 378shared SCSI........................................................................................................ 63types................................................................................................................... 61

dialogsedit drive ........................................................................................................... 294filter options....................................................................................................... 259machine details ................................................................................................. 119

disaster recovery................................................................................................... 149disk devices............................................................................................. 94, 331, 332Domain

Network Diagram............................................................................................... 111domain management ............................................................................................ 115

available NetVault Serversicons........................................................................................................... 118

available NetVault servers.................................................................................. 118pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 119

Controlled Servers ............................................................................................. 119

Page 398: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

386 Index

icons........................................................................................................... 120pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 121

Find NetVault Machine ....................................................................................... 121Server, making default for control ....................................................................... 121window ....................................................................................................... 48, 117

domain management window ............................................................................... 375domain, definition of.............................................................................................. 374drive lights, in server status window ..................................................................... 142drives

cleaning .............................................................................................................. 97scanning ............................................................................................................. 94

dumping log files ................................................................................................... 305duplication, of backup ........................................................................................... 275DVD-RAM ............................................................................................................... 61

Eedit drive dialog ..................................................................................................... 294errors

for jobs.............................................................................................................. 257in searches ....................................................................................................... 110

Ffeatures

advanced .......................................................................................................... 271NetVault................................................................................................................ 3

fieldsreports .............................................................................................................. 367

file system pluginselections in NT ................................................................................................. 163selections in W2K .............................................................................................. 167

filter options dialog ................................................................................................ 259filter options, in restore window ............................................................................ 210

by date range .................................................................................................... 211show on-line status ............................................................................................ 212

filteringlogs .................................................................................................................. 258reports .............................................................................................................. 363

findinga NetVault machine ................................................................................... 108, 121an unlisted NetVault machine ............................................................................. 109

fire wall tab, configurator....................................................................................... 344firewall, definition of .............................................................................................. 375

Page 399: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 387

firewalls ........................................................................................................... 94, 288full backup ............................................................................................................. 375

Ggeneral backup options......................................................................................... 169general tab, configurator ....................................................................................... 341generations ........................................................................................................... 136Glossary ................................................................................................................ 373GUI .................................................................................................................. 43, 375GUI tab, configurator ............................................................................................ 345

Hhardware

support ............................................................................................................. 321help............................................................................................................................ 5history tab

in jobs management window .............................................................................. 247in media management window ........................................................................... 131

IIcons

Client Status...................................................................................................... 143Clients List ........................................................................................................ 107Controlled Servers Area ..................................................................................... 120Machine

Available NetVault Machines ................................................................ 106, 118server status ..................................................................................................... 143

importing media .................................................................................................... 151incremental backups ............................................................................................. 375

procedure ......................................................................................................... 179restoring.................................................................................................... 180, 218

installingNetVault software .................................................................................................. 9

on AIX 4.2/4/3 ............................................................................................... 16on Compaq TRU64 ........................................................................................ 17on FreeBSD 3.2............................................................................................. 17on HP9000/700/800 ....................................................................................... 17on HP-UX 10/11 ............................................................................................ 17on IRIX 6.2/6.5 .............................................................................................. 18on LINUX ...................................................................................................... 18on NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03 ................................................................ 19on SCO Open Server 5 .................................................................................. 20

Page 400: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

388 Index

on Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC)........................................................................... 20on Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC)........................................................................... 21on Sun Solaris 7 ............................................................................................ 21on Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC) ............................................................................. 22on UnixWare 2.1.3 ......................................................................................... 23on UnixWare 7 .............................................................................................. 23on Windows 2000 .......................................................................................... 18on Windows 95/98 Client................................................................................ 19on Windows NT ............................................................................................. 10on Windows NT 4.0 ....................................................................................... 19

packages .......................................................................................................... 331plugins ................................................................................................................ 25

instance ................................................................................................................. 375introduction to NetVault ............................................................................................ 1

Jjob logs, extended................................................................................................. 254job management ........................................................................................... 239, 241

deleting ............................................................................................................. 246using history tabbed area

pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 247job management window

Using the History Tab ........................................................................................ 247using the Jobs Tab ............................................................................................ 245

pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 246using the Status Tab .......................................................................................... 242

Log Entry Headings ..................................................................................... 242pop-up commands ....................................................................................... 245

job status, in server status window....................................................................... 143jobdefinitions report............................................................................................... 368jobhistory report .................................................................................................... 369jobs

errors................................................................................................................ 257history............................................................................................................... 247logs .................................................................................................................. 249scheduling......................................................................................................... 225status................................................................................................................ 242triggering........................................................................................................... 285warnings ........................................................................................................... 256window ....................................................................................................... 54, 375

jobs tab, in jobs management window ................................................................. 245jukeboxes ................................................................................................................ 61

Page 401: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 389

Llibraries............................................................................................................ 81, 376

adding shared ..................................................................................................... 87creating pseudo/virtual ......................................................................................... 94creating virtual ................................................................................................... 331jukeboxes ........................................................................................................... 61stackers .............................................................................................................. 61virtual........................................................................................................ 329, 379virtual libraries ..................................................................................................... 64

library management ................................................................................................ 59license ................................................................................................................... 376license tab, configurator........................................................................................ 338licenses for NetVault products ................................................................................ 26Linux

configuring .......................................................................................................... 38uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 40

loadingsets .................................................................................................................. 268

log filesdumping............................................................................................................ 305

logging daemon tab, configurator ......................................................................... 349logs ........................................................................................................................ 249

extended ........................................................................................................... 254filtering.............................................................................................................. 258job messages .................................................................................................... 255viewing extended............................................................................................... 254window ............................................................................................... 55, 251, 376

buttons........................................................................................................ 252comands ..................................................................................................... 252

MMachine Details dialog.......................................................................................... 119machine tab, configurator ..................................................................................... 337managing

clients ............................................................................................................... 103devices ............................................................................................................... 59domains ............................................................................................................ 115jobs .......................................................................................................... 239, 241libraries ............................................................................................................... 59NetVault database ............................................................................................. 147software ................................................................................................................ 7

media

Page 402: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

390 Index

importing unknown............................................................................................. 151scanning ............................................................................................................. 94target ................................................................................................................ 378

media management .............................................................................................. 125Backup Saveset commands ............................................................................... 135

Status ......................................................................................................... 135details tab ......................................................................................................... 129history tab ......................................................................................................... 131library Info tab ................................................................................................... 132Media Commands

Properties ................................................................................................... 129Remove ...................................................................................................... 128Status ......................................................................................................... 128

media request tab .............................................................................................. 132pop-up commands ............................................................................................. 128statistics tab ...................................................................................................... 130status information .............................................................................................. 129

media management window ................................................................... 50, 127, 376media manager tab, configurator.......................................................................... 351memory size.......................................................................................................... 297menu bar ................................................................................................................. 43modified files

during backup.................................................................................................... 170modify

sets .................................................................................................................. 268mount points, backing up ...................................................................................... 170MP-RAS

uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 40

NNAS (Network Attached Storage)......................................................................... 376NetVault

basics ................................................................................................................. 41configurator ................................................................................. 31, 335, 359, 374configuring .......................................................................................................... 38database ........................................................................................................... 376database backup ............................................................................................... 149database restore ............................................................................................... 150database size ...................................................................................................... 24disaster recovery ............................................................................................... 149features ................................................................................................................ 3introduction to NetVault .......................................................................................... 1licenses for products ............................................................................................ 26

Page 403: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 391

node ................................................................................................................. 376plugins .................................................................................................................. 4Software ............................................................................................................... 7uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 39

NetVault Server StatusClient Status...................................................................................................... 143Device Status .................................................................................................... 142

Drive Lights ................................................................................................. 142Job Status

Completed Job commands ........................................................................... 145Running Job commands............................................................................... 145Scheduled Job commands ........................................................................... 144

Operator Status ................................................................................................. 146NetVault software

installing................................................................................................................ 9installing on AIX 4.2/4.3 ....................................................................................... 16installing on Compaq TRU64 ................................................................................ 17installing on FreeBSD 3.2..................................................................................... 17installing on HP9000/700/800 ............................................................................... 17installing on HP-UX 10/11 .................................................................................... 17installing on IRIX 6.2/6.5 ...................................................................................... 18installing on LINUX .............................................................................................. 18installing on NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03 ........................................................ 19installing on SCO Open Server 5 .......................................................................... 20installing on Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC)................................................................... 20installing on Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC)................................................................... 21installing on Sun Solaris 7 .................................................................................... 21installing on Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC)...................................................................... 22installing on UnixWare 2.1.3 ................................................................................. 23installing on UnixWare 7....................................................................................... 23installing on Windows 2000 .................................................................................. 18installing on Windows 95/98 Client........................................................................ 19installing on Windows NT ..................................................................................... 10installing on Windows NT 4.0................................................................................ 19

Network Attached Storage (NAS)......................................................................... 376Network Diagram .................................................................................................. 111network manager tab, configurator....................................................................... 352node ...................................................................................................................... 376nvreport ................................................................................................................. 361

arguments......................................................................................................... 361example ............................................................................................................ 362fields................................................................................................................. 367filtering.............................................................................................................. 363

Page 404: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

392 Index

sorting .............................................................................................................. 364templates .......................................................................................................... 365templates, new .................................................................................................. 366

nvtrigger ................................................................................................................ 285commands ........................................................................................................ 285

Ooperating system support ..................................................................................... 323operator status, in server status window .............................................................. 146options tab, in restore window .............................................................................. 212

Ppackage installation .............................................................................................. 331packages tab, configurator ................................................................................... 340Performance Tuning ............................................................................................. 289

block size .......................................................................................................... 297data stream ....................................................................................................... 302Gathering Statistics............................................................................................ 297memory size...................................................................................................... 297Optimizing Drive Performance .................................................................... 291, 294

phase..................................................................................................................... 377platform support .................................................................................................... 323plugin options tab, configurator ............................................................................ 343plugins

consolidate file system backups.......................................................................... 182data copy .......................................................................................................... 151definition of ....................................................................................................... 377installing.............................................................................................................. 25NetVault................................................................................................................ 4properties of in Client Management............................................................. 108, 121raw device......................................................................................................... 186

policy management window ........................................................................... 56, 377policy management, using .................................................................................... 270policy sets ............................................................................................................. 218

copy ................................................................................................................. 268definition of ....................................................................................................... 377loading.............................................................................................................. 268modify............................................................................................................... 268saving ............................................................................................................... 267schedule ........................................................................................................... 270types of ............................................................................................................. 265

policy templates ............................................................................................ 263, 265

Page 405: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 393

pop-up commandsmedia management window ............................................................................... 128

pre and post scripts............................................................................................... 278priorities

default settings .................................................................................................... 76job priorities....................................................................................................... 377of requests .......................................................................................................... 72

pseudo (virtual) libraries ......................................................................................... 94

Rraw device plugin .................................................................................................. 186

backup (NT) ...................................................................................................... 187backup (UNIX)................................................................................................... 192restore (NT)....................................................................................................... 189restore (UNIX) ................................................................................................... 193

renaminga file for restore ......................................................................................... 205, 207directory for restore............................................................................................ 206

reports ................................................................................................................... 359advancedoptions ............................................................................................... 370backuptarget ..................................................................................................... 370constants .......................................................................................................... 370jobdefinitions ..................................................................................................... 368jobhistory .......................................................................................................... 369schedules ......................................................................................................... 370selections.......................................................................................................... 370syntax ............................................................................................................... 370

requestpriorities ........................................................................................................ 72, 76

restore ........................................................................................................... 197, 377advanced options .............................................................................................. 217comprehensive .................................................................................................. 197filter options....................................................................................................... 210

By Date Range ............................................................................................ 211Show On-Line Status ................................................................................... 212

incremental backups .......................................................................................... 218NetVault database ............................................................................................. 150Options ............................................................................................................. 212raw device (NT) ................................................................................................. 189raw device (UNIX) ............................................................................................. 193renaming a directory .......................................................................................... 206renaming a file........................................................................................... 205, 207scheduling......................................................................................................... 216

Page 406: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

394 Index

search for data .................................................................................................. 209setting selection method..................................................................................... 208simple ............................................................................................................... 222to Specific Client................................................................................................ 215window ....................................................................................................... 53, 377

Restore Management ........................................................................................... 197Restoring Incremental Backups .......................................................................... 218Using the Advanced Options Tab........................................................................ 217Using the Restore Options Tab........................................................................... 212

Types of Standard Restore Options .............................................................. 213Using the Schedule Tab ..................................................................................... 216Using the Selections Tab ................................................................................... 202

Data Selection Example ............................................................................... 202Renaming or Relocating a Data Selection ..................................................... 205Selecting the Data to be Restored ................................................................ 202Setting Restore Selection Method ................................................................. 208Using Restore Filter Options......................................................................... 210Using Restore Search Facility....................................................................... 209

Using the Target Client Tab................................................................................ 215restore options

UNIX................................................................................................................. 215Windows 2000................................................................................................... 214Windows NT...................................................................................................... 213

restore window ...................................................................................................... 199commands ........................................................................................................ 201selecting data .................................................................................................... 202selections tab .................................................................................................... 202tabs .................................................................................................................. 200

SSAN (Storage Area Network) ......................................................................... 63, 378SAN devices............................................................................................................ 62Saveset Information in Details Area ..................................................................... 135savesets ........................................................................................................ 218, 378saving sets ............................................................................................................ 267scanning

drives.................................................................................................................. 94media ................................................................................................................. 94

schedule manager tab, configurator ..................................................................... 355schedule tab

in backup window .............................................................................................. 173in restore window............................................................................................... 216

schedules report ................................................................................................... 370

Page 407: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 395

schedulingbackup jobs............................................................................................... 225, 228immediate ......................................................................................................... 228jobs .................................................................................................................. 225once ................................................................................................................. 228options.............................................................................................................. 227repeating........................................................................................................... 232restore jobs ............................................................................................... 225, 228sets .................................................................................................................. 270triggered ........................................................................................................... 237

scripts, using ......................................................................................................... 280search

errors ................................................................................................................ 110searching for data ........................................................................................... 57, 209security tab, configurator ...................................................................................... 357segment tabs, in media management .......................................................... 137, 138selecting data

for backup ......................................................................................................... 162in restore window............................................................................................... 202

selecting items ........................................................................................................ 58selection set .......................................................................................................... 378selections report.................................................................................................... 370selections tab

in backup window .............................................................................................. 162in restore window............................................................................................... 202

server .................................................................................................................... 378server status window .............................................................................. 50, 139, 378

client status ....................................................................................................... 143device status ..................................................................................................... 142job status .................................................................................................. 143, 144operator status .................................................................................................. 146

service tab, configurator ....................................................................................... 339set (policy) templates .................................................................................... 263, 265setting selection method for restore ..................................................................... 208setting up a Device ................................................................................................. 63shared devices ...................................................................................................... 378shared devices installation, planning for ................................................................ 61shared SCSI devices ........................................................................................ 61, 63shared standalone drives, adding to clients ........................................................... 77simple procedure

backups ............................................................................................................ 181restore .............................................................................................................. 222

Page 408: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

396 Index

size of NetVault database....................................................................................... 24slots, cleaning ......................................................................................................... 97software

configuring .......................................................................................................... 38installing NetVault .................................................................................................. 9installing on AIX 4.2/4.3 ....................................................................................... 16installing on Compaq TRU64 ................................................................................ 17installing on FreeBSD 3.2..................................................................................... 17installing on HP9000/700/800 ............................................................................... 17installing on HP-UX 10/11 .................................................................................... 17installing on IRIX 6.2/6.5 ...................................................................................... 18installing on LINUX .............................................................................................. 18installing on NCR UNIX SVR 5.4 MP-RAS 03 ........................................................ 19installing on SCO Open Server 5 .......................................................................... 20installing on Sun Solaris 2.5 (SPARC)................................................................... 20installing on Sun Solaris 2.6 (SPARC)................................................................... 21installing on Sun Solaris 7 .................................................................................... 21installing on Sun Solaris 7 (SPARC)...................................................................... 22installing on UnixWare 2.1.3 ................................................................................. 23installing on UnixWare 7....................................................................................... 23installing on Windows 2000 .................................................................................. 18installing on Windows 95/98 Client........................................................................ 19installing on Windows NT ..................................................................................... 10installing on Windows NT 4.0................................................................................ 19support ............................................................................................................. 321uninstalling NetVault ............................................................................................ 39

Solarisuninstalling .......................................................................................................... 40

sortingreports .............................................................................................................. 364

stackers ................................................................................................................... 61statistics ................................................................................................................ 297statistics tab, in media management .................................................................... 130status

cleaning drives/slots ............................................................................................ 98status commands, in jobs management window.................................................. 243status information, in media management ........................................................... 129status tab, in job management window ................................................................ 242status, of jobs ........................................................................................................ 242Storage Area Network .......................................................................................... 378

using................................................................................................................... 62support

Page 409: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 397

hardware........................................................................................................... 321operating system ............................................................................................... 323platforms ........................................................................................................... 323software ............................................................................................................ 321

support, technical ...................................................................................................... 6syntax, report ........................................................................................................ 370

Ttape cleaning........................................................................................................... 97tape libraries, virtual................................................................................................ 64Target Device........................................................................................................ 174Target Media ................................................................................................. 175, 378target tab, in backup window ................................................................................ 175technical support ....................................................................................................... 6templates............................................................................................................... 378

policy ................................................................................................................ 265reports ...................................................................................................... 365, 366

toolbar, commands ................................................................................................. 45tracing ............................................................................................................. 37, 379

creating files...................................................................................................... 306tree ........................................................................................................................ 379triggered job .......................................................................................................... 379triggering jobs using nvtrigger ...................................................................... 237, 285troubleshooting ..................................................................................................... 303

using log files .................................................................................................... 305types of backups ................................................................................................... 169

Uuninstalling

from Linux ........................................................................................................... 40from MP-RAS ...................................................................................................... 40from Solaris......................................................................................................... 40from UNIX ........................................................................................................... 40from Windows NT ................................................................................................ 39NetVault.............................................................................................................. 39

UNIXfilesystem backup options .................................................................................. 172restore options .................................................................................................. 215uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 40

user interface .................................................................................................. 43, 375using Advanced features ...................................................................................... 271

Backup and Restore Advanced Options

Page 410: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

398 Index

Backup Life (NetVault Backup only) .............................................................. 274Compression (NetVault Backup and Restore) ................................................ 274Duplication (NetVault Backup only) ............................................................... 275Pre and Post Scripts (NetVault Backup and Restore) ..................................... 278Verify after Backup (NetVault Backup only) ................................................... 275

triggering jobs using nvtrigger ............................................................................. 285nvtrigger commands .................................................................................... 285triggered Backup Job (multiple word trigger name)......................................... 287triggered Backup Job (single word trigger name) ........................................... 286

UNIX example ................................................................................................... 284Windows NT example ........................................................................................ 280

using Filter Options Dialog.................................................................................... 259using help .................................................................................................................. 5using Logs ............................................................................................................. 249

filtering.............................................................................................................. 258Filtering Options Dialog ...................................................................................... 259Viewing Extended Logs...................................................................................... 254

Errors ......................................................................................................... 257Job Messages ............................................................................................. 255Warnings .................................................................................................... 256

using Policy (Set) Templates ................................................................................ 263Guidelines......................................................................................................... 270Set Control Functions

Saving a Set using the Save As button.......................................................... 267Standard Policy (Set) Facilities

Set Controls ................................................................................................ 266Standard Policy (Set) features ............................................................................ 266

using policy management ..................................................................................... 270using Regular Expressions ........................................................................... 315, 321using the configurator ................................................................................... 335, 359using the Edit Drive Dialog ................................................................................... 294

VVerify ..................................................................................................................... 275virtual libraries ............................................................................................... 329, 379

creating............................................................................................................. 331

Wwarnings

for jobs.............................................................................................................. 256windows

add library ......................................................................................................... 373add standalone drive.......................................................................................... 373

Page 411: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide

NetVault Administrator’s Guide 399

backup................................................................................................ 52, 159, 373client management .............................................................................. 48, 105, 374device management .................................................................. 47, 64, 65, 66, 375domain management ........................................................................... 48, 117, 375jobs ............................................................................................................ 54, 375logs .................................................................................................... 55, 251, 376media management ............................................................................. 50, 127, 376policy management...................................................................................... 56, 377restore ................................................................................................ 53, 199, 377server status ....................................................................................... 50, 139, 378

Windows 2000adding devices .................................................................................................... 92backup options .................................................................................................. 171file system selections ......................................................................................... 167restore options .................................................................................................. 214

Windows NTbackup options .................................................................................................. 171devices ............................................................................................................... 63file system selections ......................................................................................... 163installing NetVault software on.............................................................................. 10restore options .................................................................................................. 213uninstalling .......................................................................................................... 39

Page 412: NetVault Administrator’s Guide - UCLouvain · LINUX (Intel x86) ... Tips on Resolving Connection Problems Between NetVault servers and clients ... NetVault Administrator’s Guide